JP2015006581A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To prevent a situation where fairness in a game lacks from occurring in a game machine for executing a predetermined performance for reporting a possibility that specific display results in variable display or for reporting whether a variable winning device is controlled to a state where entry of a game ball occurs easily.SOLUTION: A predetermined performance is executed to report a possibility that specific display (for example, jackpot pattern) results in variable display or to report whether a variable winning device is controlled to a state (for example, an open state) where entry of a game medium occurs easily. Execution of the predetermined performance is limited when no variable display is performed.

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine that performs variable display based on the establishment of a variable display start condition and controls an advantageous state advantageous to a player when a specific display result is derived and displayed as a display result.

  As a gaming machine, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when a game ball wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. There is something to be done. Furthermore, a variable display means capable of variably displaying (also referred to as “variation”) special symbols and decorative symbols (hereinafter also referred to as “first identification information”) is provided, and the combination of the first identification information in the variable display means. Some are configured to give a predetermined game value to a player when the display result is a specific display result.

  The game value is the right that the state of the variable winning ball apparatus provided in the gaming area of the gaming machine becomes advantageous for a player who is easy to win, and the right for becoming advantageous for a player. In other words, or a condition for winning a prize ball is easily established.

  In the pachinko gaming machine, a predetermined display result of the variable display of the first identification information that is started by the variable display means based on the passing of the game medium through the start area (for example, a game ball wins at the start winning opening) is determined in advance. When the specified display result is derived and displayed, a “big hit” occurs. Note that the derivation display is to stop and display a symbol (excluding stop before so-called re-variation). When a big hit occurs, the game state shifts to a specific gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state in which a special variable winning device (big winning opening) is opened a predetermined number of times and a hitting ball is easy to win). And in each open period, if there is a prize for a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the big prize opening, the big prize opening is closed. And the number of times the special winning opening is opened is fixed to a predetermined number (for example, 15 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the big winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses. Hereinafter, the opening period of each special winning opening may be referred to as a round.

  Some pachinko machines are provided with a variable winning device that can be controlled in an open state and a closed state in a starting area. In such a gaming machine, variable display of second identification information (for example, a normal symbol) provided separately from the first identification information is performed, and the display result of variable display of the second identification information is a predetermined display result (for example, When the winning symbol is reached, the variable winning device is controlled to the open state. When the variable winning device is controlled to be in the open state, the game medium easily passes through the start area, and the variable display of the first identification information is easily performed.

Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2004-202134 (paragraphs 0162-0163, FIG. 35)

  It is an object of the present invention to prevent a situation where the game is not fair.

A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine that performs variable display based on the fact that a variable display start condition is satisfied, and controls an advantageous state advantageous to the player when a specific display result is derived and displayed as a display result. Then, based on the fact that the game medium has passed the predetermined area, the variable winning device control means for controlling the variable winning device so that the game medium can easily enter, and the possibility of a specific display result in the variable display are notified. Or a predetermined effect executing means for executing a predetermined effect for notifying whether or not the variable winning device is controlled so that the game medium can easily enter, and a predetermined period of time when the variable display is not performed. It is characterized by comprising a predetermined effect limiting means for limiting the execution of the effect.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation where the game is not fair.

It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine from the front. It is a side view which shows the structural example of a stick controller. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a game control board (main board). It is a block diagram showing an example of circuit configuration of an effect control board, a lamp driver board and an audio output board. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which CPU in a main board | substrate performs. It is a flowchart which shows a 4 ms timer interruption process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern of the decoration design prepared beforehand. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows a big hit determination table and a small hit determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the big hit classification determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for big hits, and the variation pattern classification determination table for small hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for deviation. It is explanatory drawing which shows a hit fluctuation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a deviation variation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the determination result designation command at the time of winning. It is a flowchart which shows a normal symbol process process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the normal symbol determination table. It is a flowchart which shows a gate switch passage process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal symbol fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal symbol fluctuation | variation process. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of a normal symbol stop. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a starting port switch passage process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a pending | holding buffer. It is a flowchart which shows a winning time determination process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a display result designation | designated command transmission process. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which CPU for production control performs. It is a flowchart which shows command analysis processing. It is a flowchart which shows command analysis processing. It is a flowchart which shows command analysis processing. It is a flowchart which shows command analysis processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the value of game state data. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the determination result memory buffer at the time of winning. It is explanatory drawing which shows the random number which the microcomputer for production control uses. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the execution area of a predetermined effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a predetermined | prescribed effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a predetermined | prescribed effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a predetermined | prescribed effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example in the case of performing the predetermined | prescribed effect which alert | reports the notification result of losing before alert | reporting that a specific effect (reach effect) is performed. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st predetermined | prescribed effect process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st predetermined | prescribed effect process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st predetermined | prescribed effect process. It is explanatory drawing which shows a 1st predetermined | prescribed effect determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an open | release alert | report effect process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows a decoration design change start process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the stop symbol of a decoration symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the temporary stop symbol in a pseudo-continuous production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of process data. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd predetermined production process (1). It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd predetermined production process (1). It is explanatory drawing which shows a 2nd predetermined | prescribed effect determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a 2nd predetermined | prescribed effect determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of an effect replacement determination table. It is a flowchart which shows a process during decoration design change. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd predetermined production process (2). It is a flowchart which shows a decoration design change stop process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the opening timing of a variable winning ball apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the process during decoration design change in the modification 1. It is a flowchart which shows a privilege corresponding | compatible effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the presentation control command in the modification 2. 10 is a flowchart showing a decorative symbol variation start process in Modification 2. It is a flowchart which shows the decoration design change start process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd predetermined production process (1) in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd predetermined | prescribed effect process (2) in 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the 2nd predetermined production determination table in 3rd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the change category command in 4th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the change category command in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the presentation control process process in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd predetermined production prefetch process in 4th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the 2nd predetermined production determination table in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the decoration design change start process in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the decoration pattern change process in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd predetermined | prescribed effect replacement process in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the decoration symbol fluctuation | variation stop process in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st predetermined | prescribed effect process in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd predetermined production process (1) in 5th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the 2nd predetermined production determination table in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd predetermined | prescribed effect process (2) in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd predetermined | prescribed effect process (2) in 5th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect replacement determination table in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd predetermined | prescribed effect process (1) in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows a part of 2nd predetermined effect process (2) in 6th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the 2nd predetermined production determination table in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the decoration pattern change process in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd predetermined production process (2) in 8th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the normal symbol determination table in the modification 3.

Embodiment 1 FIG.
DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1 that is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as seen from the front.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be opened and closed. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape that is provided in the game frame so as to be opened and closed. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts (games to be described later) attached to them. A structure including the board 6).

  On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2 is a hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3. Under the hitting ball supply tray 3, there are provided a surplus ball receiving tray 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 3, and a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 5 for firing the hitting ball. A game board 6 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board 6 and various components attached to the plate-like body. In addition, a game area 7 is formed on the front surface of the game board 6 in which a game ball that has been struck can flow down.

  A member forming the surplus ball tray (lower plate) 4 is configured in a stick shape (bar shape) at a predetermined position (for example, the central portion of the lower plate) on the upper surface, for example, on the upper surface, and is gripped by the player in a plurality of directions. A stick controller 122 that can be tilted is attached (front, rear, left, and right).

  FIG. 2 is a side view showing a configuration example of the stick controller 122. The stick controller 122 includes an operation rod 122A held by the player, and a trigger button 121 is provided at a predetermined position of the operation rod 122A (for example, a position where the index finger of the operator is hooked when the player holds the operation rod 122A). Is provided. The trigger button 121 can be operated in a predetermined direction by performing a push-pull operation with a predetermined operation finger (for example, index finger) while the player holds the operation rod 122A of the stick controller 122 with an operation hand (for example, the left hand). It is configured as follows.

  A trigger sensor 125 (see FIG. 4) for detecting a predetermined instruction operation by a push / pull operation on the trigger button 121 or the like is built in the operation rod 122A. A tilt direction sensor unit 123 that detects a tilting operation with respect to the operating rod 122A is provided in the main body of the lower pan below the stick controller 122. For example, the tilt direction sensor unit 123 includes two transmissive photosensors arranged in parallel to the board surface of the game board 2 on the left side of the center position of the operation rod 122A when viewed from the player's side facing the pachinko gaming machine 1. 4) combining a parallel sensor pair) and two transmission type photosensors (vertical sensor pair) arranged perpendicularly to the board surface of the game board 6 on the right side of the center position of the operation rod 122A when viewed from the player side. It includes two transmissive photosensors.

  In addition, the attachment position of the stick controller 122 in the lower plate is not limited to the central portion of the lower plate, and may be a position near to the left or right.

  The member that forms the hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3 can be operated by a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation, for example, by pressing down on a predetermined position on the upper surface of the upper plate body (for example, above the stick controller 122). A push button 120 is provided. The push button 120 is configured to be able to detect a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from a player mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. A push sensor 124 (see FIG. 4) for detecting an operation action of the player performed on the push button 120 is provided in the main body of the upper plate at the position where the push button 120 is installed. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 1, the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 are mounted in the vertical position in the center portion of the upper plate and the lower plate, but the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 are maintained while maintaining the vertical position relationship. The attachment position of the stick controller 122 may be a position that is shifted to either the left or right in the upper plate and the lower plate. Further, the positional relationship between the mounting positions of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 may be, for example, a horizontal positional relationship instead of the vertical direction.

  The trigger button 121 provided on the stick controller 122 is configured such that the player can perform an instruction operation by pushing and pulling with an operation finger while the player holds the operation rod 122A of the stick controller 122 with an operating hand. Yes. The push button 120 is provided at a predetermined position of the glass door frame 2 that forms an upper plate separately from the stick controller 122, and the player pushes the push button 120 with an operating hand even when the player does not hold the operation rod 122A of the stick controller 122. The instruction operation can be performed depending on the situation. Therefore, compared to the push button 120, it is difficult to perform a continuous hitting operation, which is a continuous instruction operation, on the trigger button 121.

  Further, the stick controller 122 incorporates a vibrator motor 126 for causing the stick controller 122 to vibrate. In this embodiment, for example, the vibration is generated by biasing the center of gravity of the shaft of the vibrator motor 126 or attaching a weight to the shaft, and controlling the rotation of the vibrator motor 126 by the effect control microcomputer 100 to thereby generate a stick controller. It is controlled so that 122 is vibrated.

  On the right side of the effect display device 9, a first special symbol display (first variable display unit) 8a for variably displaying the first special symbol as identification information is provided. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display 8a is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. In other words, the first special symbol display 8a is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. Further, on the right side of the effect display device 9 (next to the right of the first special symbol display 8a), a second special symbol display (second variable display unit) 8b for variably displaying the second special symbol as identification information. Is also provided. The second special symbol display 8b is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the second special symbol display 8b is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9.

  The small display is formed in a square shape, for example. In this embodiment, the type of the first special symbol and the type of the second special symbol are the same (for example, both 0 to 9), but the types may be different. Further, the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b may be configured to variably display numbers (or two-digit symbols) of, for example, 00 to 99, for example.

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol indicator 8a and the second special symbol indicator 8b are collectively referred to as a special symbol indicator (variable display unit). There are things to do.

  Although the gaming machine of this embodiment includes two special symbol indicators 8a and 8b, the gaming machine may include only one special symbol indicator.

  For the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first start condition or the second start condition, which is the variable display execution condition, is satisfied (for example, the game ball has the first start winning opening 13 or the second start winning opening) 14 after passing (including winning)), the variable display start condition (for example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0 and the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed) The state is started and the big hit game is not executed), and when the variable display time (fluctuation time) elapses, the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. Note that the passing of a game ball means that the game ball has passed through a predetermined area such as a prize opening or a gate, and that includes a game ball entering (winning) a prize opening. It is. Deriving and displaying the display result is to finally stop and display a symbol (an example of identification information).

  An effect display device 9 composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD) is provided near the center of the game area 7. The effect display device 9 corresponds to a variable display device that performs variable display of decorative symbols. In the decorative symbol display area, there is a symbol display area for variably displaying, for example, three decorative symbols (for production) “left”, “middle”, and “right”. The symbol display area includes “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas, but the position of the symbol display area does not have to be fixed on the display screen of the effect display device 9. Three areas of the display area may be separated. The effect display device 9 is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the first special symbol display 8a is executing variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control microcomputer causes the effect display device 9 to execute the effect display along with the variable display, and the second special symbol display 8a executes the second special display. When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed on the symbol display 8b, the effect display is executed by the effect display device 9 along with the variable display, so that the progress of the game can be easily grasped. .

  The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the decorative symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the decorative symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Synchronous means that the start time and end time of variable display are substantially the same (may be exactly the same) and the variable display period is substantially the same (may be exactly the same). Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the decorative display that reminds the jackpot on the effect display device 9 The combination of is stopped and displayed.

  Further, in the effect display device 9, symbols other than the symbol that becomes the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol of the left and right middle symbols) continue for a predetermined time, and the jackpot symbol (for example, the left middle right symbol is aligned with the same symbol). Stops, swings, scales, or deforms in a state that matches the symbol combination), or multiple symbols fluctuate synchronously in the same symbol, or the position of the display symbol is switched Thus, an effect performed in a state where the possibility of occurrence of a big hit (hereinafter, these states are referred to as reach states) before the final result is displayed is referred to as reach effect. Further, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach mode. Furthermore, variable display including reach production is called reach variable display. And when the display result of the symbol variably displayed on the effect display device 9 is not a big hit symbol, it becomes “out” and the variation display state ends. A player plays a game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

  In this embodiment, the decorative display is changed as a liquid crystal display effect in the effect display device 9. In the effect display device 9, for example, an effect using a character image, a jackpot determination, and a change pattern determination are performed. An effect of displaying a notification image based on the result is also executed.

  Further, when the shifted symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the effect display device 9, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started after the variable symbol display is started. There is a case where a predetermined combination of decorative symbols that do not become reach is stopped and displayed without reaching the reach state. Such a decorative display variable display mode is referred to as a “non-reach” (also referred to as “normal shift”) variable display mode when the variable display result is an out-of-order design.

  When the shifted symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the effect display device 9, the decorative symbol variable display state starts after the variable symbol variable display is started. After reaching the reach state, the reach effect is executed, and a predetermined combination of decorative symbols that does not eventually become a big hit symbol may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the decorative design is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach out”) when the variable display result is “out of”.

  In this embodiment, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b, the reach effect is executed after the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state. Finally, the decorative symbols are all stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R on the effect display device 9.

  A winning device having a first start winning port 13 is provided below the effect display device 9. The game ball won in the first start winning opening 13 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the first start opening switch 13a.

  A variable winning ball device 15 having a second starting winning port 14 through which a game ball can be won is provided below a winning device having a first starting winning port (first starting port) 13. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening (second start opening) 14 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the second start opening switch 14a. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by a solenoid 16. When the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the game ball can be awarded to the second starting winning port 14 (it is easier to start winning), which is advantageous for the player. In the state where the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the open state, it is easier for the game ball to win the second start winning opening 14 than the first starting winning opening 13. In addition, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, the game ball does not win the second start winning opening 14. Therefore, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, it is easier for the game ball to win the first starting winning port 13 than the second starting winning port 14. In the state where the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the closed state, it may be configured that the winning is possible (that is, it is difficult for the gaming ball to win) although it is difficult to win a prize.

  Hereinafter, the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as a start winning opening or a starting opening.

  When the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in the open state, the game ball heading for the variable winning ball device 15 is very likely to win the second start winning port 14. The first start winning opening 13 is provided directly under the effect display device 9, but the interval between the lower end of the effect display device 9 and the first start winning opening 13 is further reduced, or the first start winning opening is set. The nail arrangement around the first start winning opening 13 is made difficult to guide the game balls to the first starting winning opening 13 so that the winning rate of the second starting winning opening 14 is increased. It is also possible to make the direction higher than the winning rate of the first start winning opening 13.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 that opens and closes only the second start winning opening 14 is provided. Any of the start winning ports 14 may be provided with a variable winning ball device that performs an opening / closing operation.

  Above the second special symbol display 8b, there is a second special symbol hold memory display 18b comprising four displays for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening 14, that is, the second reserved memory number. Is provided. The second special symbol storage memory display 18b increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 every time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  Further, above the second special symbol hold memory display 18b, the number of effective winning balls that have entered the first start winning opening 13, that is, the first hold memory number (the hold memory is also referred to as start memory or start prize memory). ) Is displayed, a first special symbol reservation storage display 18a is provided. The first special symbol storage memory indicator 18a increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 each time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  Also, at the lower part of the display screen of the effect display device 9, there are provided a first reserved memory display unit 18c for displaying the first reserved memory number and a second reserved memory display unit 18d for displaying the second reserved memory number. ing. In addition, you may make it provide the area | region (sum total pending | holding memory display part) which displays the total number (sum total pending memory count) which is the sum total of the 1st pending memory count and the 2nd pending memory count. As described above, if the summation pending storage display section for displaying the total number is provided, it is possible to easily grasp the total number of execution conditions that are not satisfied with the variable display start condition.

  The effect display device 9 is for decoration (for effects) during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a and during the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b. Variable display of decorative symbols as the symbols. The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the decorative symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the decorative symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the decorative display that reminds the jackpot on the effect display device 9 The combination of is stopped and displayed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a special variable winning ball device 20 is provided below the variable winning ball device 15. The special variable winning ball apparatus 20 includes an opening / closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, and the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 8b. When the open / close plate is controlled to be opened by the solenoid 21 in the specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) that occurs when the symbol is derived and displayed, the prize winning area (first prize winning opening) is opened. become. The game ball that has won the big winning opening is detected by the count switch 23.

  On the left side of the effect display device 9, a normal symbol display 10 for variably displaying normal symbols is provided. In this embodiment, the normal symbol display 10 is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the normal symbol display 10 is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. Moreover, the small display is formed in, for example, a square shape. Note that the normal symbol display 10 may be configured to variably display a number (or a two-digit symbol) of, for example, 00 to 99. Further, the normal symbol display 10 is not limited to a 7-segment LED or the like, for example, a display capable of lighting a predetermined symbol display (for example, a decoration lamp capable of alternately lighting and displaying “O” and “X”). It may be comprised.

  On the display screen of the effect display device 9, an effect area 9 </ b> F where an effect that suggests a display result of a normal symbol, a display result of a special symbol, and an effect that suggests the type of variation pattern is displayed.

  A vane-like movable member 76 driven by the motor 24 is provided on the left part of the effect display device 9. When the movable member 76 is controlled to a position where the movable member 76 is tilted to the left, the game ball enters a state where it can enter the second grand prize opening (open state). When the movable member 76 is controlled to a position that closes the second grand prize opening, the game ball cannot enter the second big prize opening (closed state). The game ball that has entered the second grand prize opening is detected by the second prize switch 71.

  In this embodiment, during the big hit game based on the 15R normal big hit, during the big hit game based on the 2R probability variable big hit, and during the big hit game based on the 15R probability variable big hit, the first big prize winning opening is controlled to the open state. Further, during the big hit game state, during the big hit game based on the sudden probability change big hit, and during the big hit game based on the sudden probability change big hit, the second big prize winning opening is controlled to the open state.

  “15R normal big hit” is a big hit that is controlled to the big hit gaming state of 15 rounds (the openable time of each round is, for example, 29 seconds) and shifts to the normal state (non-probability change state) after the big hit gaming state ends ( However, it is controlled to the time-saving state until the end of the variable display for a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, 100 times) after the end of the big hit game). The “2R probability variable big hit” is a big hit that is controlled to a two-round big hit gaming state and shifts to a probability changing state (high probability state) after the big hit gaming state ends (however, it is also controlled to a short time state). “15R probable big hit” is a big hit that is controlled to the big hit gaming state of 15 rounds (the openable time of each round is, for example, 29 seconds) and is shifted to the probable change state after the big hit gaming state ends (however, in the short-time state) Is also controlled).

  Hereinafter, the 15R probability variation jackpot and the 15R normal jackpot may be collectively referred to as “15R jackpot”.

  “Suddenly promising big hit” is allowed up to a small number of times of opening the big winning opening (second big winning opening) compared to 15R big hit or 2R probable big hit (in this embodiment, opening for 10 seconds is twice). However, after the big hit gaming state based on the probability change big hit suddenly ends, the state is shifted to the probability change state (however, only the probability change state is controlled, not the time reduction state). “Suddenly probable big hit” is also called “surprise big hit”.

  "Suddenly promising jackpot" is the same as in the case of 15R jackpot, during the jackpot game, the big prize opening (second big prize mouth) is opened 15 times (15 rounds), but about the first 2 times (2 rounds) In the same way as in the case of sudden probability change big hit, the opening time of the big prize opening is 10 seconds. Therefore, at the initial stage after the big hit gaming state based on suddenly probable jackpots is started, the player cannot distinguish whether suddenly probable big hits or suddenly probable jackpots have occurred, so Can be improved. In addition, after the big hit gaming state based on the big hit suddenly seemingly changed to the big hit, the state is shifted to the positive change state (however, it is also controlled to the short time state). Note that “suddenly promising big hit” is also referred to as “outright promising big hit”. In addition, “suddenly promising masquerade jackpot (surprise masquerading jackpot)” may be simply referred to as “masquerade bonanza”.

  Further, in this embodiment, the number of rounds of jackpot game executed when a sudden probability change jackpot occurs suddenly is 2. However, if the opening time of each round is extremely short compared to the case of 15R jackpot, it is more than two rounds. May be a large number of rounds. For example, it may be the same as the number of rounds of jackpot game executed when 15R jackpot occurs.

  “Small hit” is a hit that is permitted up to the number of times that the number of times of opening of the big prize opening (second big prize opening) is smaller than that of the big hit (in this embodiment, the opening for 10 seconds is twice). When the small hit game ends, the game state does not change. That is, there is no transition from the probability variation state to the normal state or from the normal state to the certain variation state. In this embodiment, in the big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state based on the sudden probability change big hit, the opening pattern of the big prize opening is the same. By controlling in such a manner, if the winning opening is opened twice for 10 seconds, it is impossible to recognize whether it is a sudden big hit or a small hit, so the player is in a high probability state (probable change). State) can be expected, and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, in this specification, it is set as the round of opening times also about a small hit. Also, when a fake big hit occurs, the big winning opening is opened for a long time after the big winning opening is opened twice in the first round with the same opening time as the opening time in the round of odd and big hits and the small hit round. In rounds after the round, the big prize opening may be opened with the same opening time as the opening time in the round of 15R jackpot.

  When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started. When the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (a winning symbol, for example, a symbol “7”), the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. In other words, the state of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is a state that is advantageous from a disadvantageous state for the player when the normal symbol is a stop symbol (a state in which a game ball can be awarded at the second start winning port 14). To change. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol holding storage display 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 32 is provided. Each time there is a game ball passing through the gate 32, that is, every time a game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol storage memory display 41 increases the number of LEDs to be turned on by one. Each time variable display on the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one. In addition, a probability variation state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit compared to the normal state is high (a state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit as a result of fluctuation display of special symbols is increased compared to the normal state). Then, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased. Even in the short state (the game state in which the variable display time of the special symbol is shortened) when the symbol variation time is shortened although it is not the probability variation state, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased.

  At the lower part of the game board 6, there is an out port 26 into which a hit ball that has not won a prize is taken. In addition, four speakers 27 that utter sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the upper left and right and lower left and right outside the game area 7. On the outer periphery of the game area 7, a frame LED 28 provided on the front frame is provided.

  In the gaming machine, a ball striking device (not shown) that drives a driving motor in response to a player operating the batting operation handle 5 and uses the rotational force of the driving motor to launch a gaming ball to the gaming area 7. ) Is provided. A game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 7 through a ball striking rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descends the game area 7. When the game ball enters the first start winning opening 13 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a, if the variable display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends, 1), the first special symbol display 8a starts variable display (variation) of the first special symbol, and the effect display device 9 starts variable display of decorative symbols. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol and the decorative symbol corresponds to winning in the first start winning opening 13. If the variable display of the first special symbol cannot be started, the first reserved memory number is increased by 1 on the condition that the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  When the game ball enters the second start winning opening 14 and is detected by the second start opening switch 14a, if the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the special symbol variable display ends, 2), the second special symbol display unit 8b starts variable display (variation) of the second special symbol, and the effect display device 9 starts variable display of the decorative symbol. That is, the variable display of the second special symbol and the decorative symbol corresponds to winning in the second start winning opening 14. If the variable display of the second special symbol cannot be started, the second reserved memory number is increased by 1 on condition that the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  In this embodiment, when the probability variation is a big hit, the game state is shifted to a high probability state, and the game ball is easily started and won (that is, in the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b and the effect display device 9). It shifts to a high base state, which is a gaming state controlled so that a variable display execution condition is easily established. In addition, when the gaming state is shifted to the short time state, the state is shifted to the high base state. In the case of the high base state, for example, the frequency that the variable winning ball device 15 is opened is increased or the time that the variable winning ball device 15 is open is increased compared to the case where the high base state is not used. It becomes easier to win a start.

  Instead of extending the time during which the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the open state (also referred to as the open extended state), the normal symbol display unit 10 shifts to the normal symbol probability changing state in which the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 will be a hit symbol is increased. Depending on the situation, the high base state may be entered. When the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 10 becomes a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. In this case, by controlling the transition to the normal symbol probability changing state, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the frequency at which the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened is increased. Therefore, when the normal symbol probability changing state is entered, the opening time and the number of opening times of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased, and the start winning state becomes easy (high base state). That is, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 can be increased when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol or the stop symbol of the special symbol is a probabilistic symbol. It changes to an advantageous state (a state where it is easy to win a start). It should be noted that increasing the number of times of opening is a concept including changing from a closed state to an open state.

  Moreover, you may transfer to a high base state by shifting to the normal symbol time short state where the fluctuation time (variable display period) of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 10 is shortened. In the normal symbol time-short state, since the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened, the frequency of starting the variation of the normal symbol increases, and as a result, the frequency of hitting the normal symbol increases. Therefore, when the frequency that the normal symbol is hit increases, the frequency that the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened is increased, and the start winning state is easily set (high base state).

  In addition, the transition time of special symbols and decorative symbols will be shortened by shifting to the short time state when the variation time (variable display period) of special symbols and decorative symbols is shortened. The frequency of being played (in other words, the digestion of the reserved memory becomes faster), and the situation where an invalid start prize is generated can be reduced. Therefore, an effective start winning is likely to occur, and as a result, the possibility of a big hit game being increased.

  Furthermore, by making transitions to all the states shown above (open extended state, normal symbol probability change state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state), it will be easier to win a start (shift to a high base state). May be. In addition, it becomes easier to win a start (high base) by shifting to any one of the above states (open extended state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state). Transition to a state). In addition, it is easier to win a start by shifting to any one of the above states (open extended state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state). You may make it move to a base state.

  FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 31. FIG. 3 also shows the payout control board 37, the effect control board 80, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to game control means) 560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 31. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing a game control (game progress control) program and the like, a RAM 55 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations in accordance with the program, and an I / O port unit 57. including. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are built in the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to incorporate at least the CPU 56 and the RAM 55, and the ROM 54 may be external or built-in. The I / O port unit 57 may be externally attached. The game control microcomputer 560 further includes a random number circuit 503 that generates hardware random numbers (random numbers generated by the hardware circuit).

  The RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power supply created on the power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 55 is stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied). In particular, at least data (a special symbol process flag or the like) corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means, and data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls are stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the entire RAM 55 is backed up.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 54, so that the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56) executes (or performs processing) hereinafter. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 31.

  The random number circuit 503 is a hardware circuit that is used to generate a random number for determination to determine whether or not to win a jackpot based on a display result of variable symbol special display. The random number circuit 503 updates numerical data in accordance with a set update rule within a numerical range in which an initial value (for example, 0) and an upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and starts at a random timing Based on the fact that the winning time is the reading (extraction) of the numerical data, it has a random number generation function that makes the numerical data read out random.

  The random number circuit 503 includes a numeric data update range selection setting function (initial value selection setting function and upper limit value selection setting function), numeric data update rule selection setting function, and numeric data update rule selection. It has various functions such as a switching function. With such a function, the randomness of the generated random numbers can be improved.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 has a function of setting an initial value of numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503. For example, a predetermined calculation is performed using the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 stored in a predetermined storage area such as the ROM 54 (an ID number assigned with a different value for each product of the game control microcomputer 560). The numerical data obtained by the execution is set as the initial value of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503. By performing such processing, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit 503 can be further improved.

  An input driver circuit 58 for supplying detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the start port switch 13a, the count switch 23, and the second winning port switch 71 to the game control microcomputer 560 is also mounted on the main board 31. Further, the solenoid 16 that opens and closes the variable winning ball apparatus 15, the solenoid 21 that opens and closes the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 that forms the special winning opening, and the movable member 76 that forms the second large winning opening are controlled to be opened. An output circuit 59 for driving the motor 24 to be driven according to a command from the game control microcomputer 560 is also mounted on the main board 31.

  In addition, the game control microcomputer 560 includes a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b that variably displays special symbols, a normal symbol display 10 that variably displays normal symbols, and a first special symbol hold memory. Display control of the display 18a, the second special symbol storage memory display 18b, and the normal symbol storage memory display 41 is performed.

  An information output circuit (not shown) that outputs an information output signal such as jackpot information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer is also mounted on the main board 31.

  In this embodiment, the effect control means (configured by the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 instructs the effect contents from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. The effect control command is received, and display control of the effect display device 9 for variably displaying the decorative design is performed.

  The effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80 controls the display of the frame LED 28 provided on the frame side via the lamp driver board 35 and from the speaker 27 via the audio output board 70. Control the sound output.

  FIG. 4 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of the relay board 77, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the audio output board 70. In the example shown in FIG. 4, the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but may be equipped with a microcomputer. Further, without providing the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70, only the effect control board 80 may be provided for effect control.

  The effect control board 80 is equipped with an effect control microcomputer 100 including an effect control CPU 101 and a RAM for storing information relating to effects such as decorative symbol process flags. The RAM may be externally attached. In this embodiment, the RAM in the production control microcomputer 100 is not backed up. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 101 operates in accordance with a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and receives a capture signal from the main board 31 input via the relay board 77 ( In response to the (effect control INT signal), an effect control command is received via the input driver 102 and the input port 103. Further, the effect control CPU 101 causes the VDP (video display processor) 109 to perform display control of the effect display device 9 based on the effect control command.

  In this embodiment, a VDP 109 that performs display control of the effect display device 9 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 100 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 109 has an address space independent of the production control microcomputer 100, and maps a VRAM therein. VRAM is a buffer memory for developing image data. Then, the VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 9 via the frame memory.

  The effect control CPU 101 outputs to the VDP 109 a command for reading out necessary data from a CGROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command. The CGROM stores in advance character image data and moving image data to be displayed on the effect display device 9, specifically, a person, characters, figures, symbols, etc. (including decorative symbols), and background image data. ROM. The VDP 109 reads image data from the CGROM in response to the instruction from the effect control CPU 101. The VDP 109 executes display control based on the read image data.

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 102 on the effect control board 80. The input driver 102 passes the signal input from the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 80 (does not pass the signal in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulating means.

  As a signal direction regulating means, the signal inputted from the main board 31 is allowed to pass through the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the effect control board 80 (the signal is not passed in the direction from the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). The unidirectional circuit 74 is mounted. For example, a diode or a transistor is used as the unidirectional circuit. FIG. 4 illustrates a diode. A unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal. Furthermore, since the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 31 via the output port 571 that is a unidirectional circuit, the signal from the relay board 77 toward the inside of the main board 31 is restricted. That is, the signal from the relay board 77 does not enter the inside of the main board 31 (the game control microcomputer 560 side). The output port 571 is a part of the I / O port unit 57 shown in FIG. Further, a signal driver circuit that is a unidirectional circuit may be further provided outside the output port 571 (on the relay board 77 side).

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that a player's operation action on the trigger button 121 has been detected from the trigger sensor 125 via the input port 106. Further, the effect control CPU 101 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that a player's operation action on the push button 120 has been detected from the push sensor 124 via the input port 106. Further, the production control CPU 101 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action on the operation rod 122A of the stick controller 122 has been detected from the tilt direction sensor unit 123 via the input port 106. To do. Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a drive signal to the vibrator motor 126 via the output port 105 to cause the stick controller 122 to vibrate.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a signal for driving the LED to the lamp driver board 35 via the output port 105. Further, the production control CPU 101 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 70 via the output port 104.

  In the lamp driver board 35, a signal for driving the LED is input to the LED driver 352 via the input driver 351. The LED driver 352 supplies a current to a light emitter provided on the frame side such as the frame LED 28 based on a signal for driving the LED.

  In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input driver 702. The voice synthesizing IC 703 generates voice or sound effect according to the sound number data, and outputs it to the amplifier circuit 705. The amplification circuit 705 outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC 703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 706 to the speaker 27. The voice data ROM 704 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data indicating the sound effect or sound output mode in a time series in a predetermined period (for example, a decorative symbol variation period).

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the game control microcomputer 560 on the main board 31. When power is supplied to the gaming machine and power supply is started, the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high level, and the gaming control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) After executing a security check process, which is a process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid, the main process after step S1 is started. In the main process, the CPU 56 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets the interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to interrupt mode 2 (step S2), and a stack pointer designation address is set to the stack pointer (step S3). After initialization of the built-in device (CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port), which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits)) is performed (step S4), the RAM is accessible (Step S5). In the interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 56 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is This mode indicates an interrupt address.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks the state of the output signal (clear signal) of a clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply board) input via the input port (step S6). When the ON is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 56 executes a normal initialization process (steps S10 to S15).

  If the clear switch is not on, check whether data protection processing of the backup RAM area (for example, power supply stop processing such as addition of parity data) was performed when power supply to the gaming machine was stopped (Step S7). When it is confirmed that such protection processing is not performed, the CPU 56 executes initialization processing. Whether there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed, for example, by the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop process.

  When it is confirmed that the power supply stop process has been performed, the CPU 56 performs data check of the backup RAM area (step S8). In this embodiment, a parity check is performed as a data check. Therefore, in step S8, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop process. When the power supply is stopped after an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) is normal (matched). That the check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, an initialization process that is executed when the power is turned on is not performed when the power supply is stopped.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 recovers the game state restoration process (steps S41 to S43) for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electrical component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Process). Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S41), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 55) (step S42). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power source. In the backup setting table, initialization data for areas that may be initialized among the work areas is set. As a result of the processing in steps S41 and S42, the saved contents of the work area that should not be initialized remain as they are. The part that should not be initialized is, for example, data indicating the game state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, probability variation flag, time reduction flag, etc.), and the area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer) ), A portion in which data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 transmits a power failure recovery designation command as an initialization command at the time of power supply recovery (step S43). Then, the process proceeds to step S14.

  In this embodiment, it is confirmed whether the data in the backup RAM area is stored using both the backup flag and the check data. However, only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as an opportunity for executing the game state recovery process.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10). The RAM clear process initializes predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a random number for normal symbol determination) to 0, but an arbitrary value or a predetermined value It may be initialized to. In addition, the entire area of the RAM 55 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a random number for normal symbol determination) may be left as it is. Further, the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S12).

  By the processing in steps S11 and S12, for example, a normal symbol per-determining random number counter, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, and other flags for selectively performing processing according to the control state are initialized. Value is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 initializes a sub board (a board on which a microcomputer other than the main board 31 is mounted) (a command indicating that the game control microcomputer 560 has executed an initialization process). Is also transmitted to the sub-board (step S13). For example, when the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the initialization designation command, the effect display device 9 performs screen display for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been performed, that is, initialization notification.

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a random number circuit setting process for initial setting of the random number circuit 503 (step S14). For example, the CPU 56 performs setting according to the random number circuit setting program to cause the random number circuit 503 to update the value of the random R.

  In step S15, the CPU 56 sets a CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 560 so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 4 ms). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 4 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every 4 ms.

  When the execution of the initialization process (steps S10 to S15) is completed, the CPU 56 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S17) and the initial value random number update process (step S18) in the main process. When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt disabled state is set (step S16). When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are finished, the interrupt enabled state is set. Set (step S19). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the type of the variation pattern or a random number for determining the variation pattern, and the display random number update process is for generating the display random number. This is a process for updating the count value of the counter. The initial value random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number is the initial value of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to win for a normal symbol (normal random number generation counter for normal symbol determination). It is a random number to determine. A game control process for controlling the progress of the game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 560 controls game devices such as an effect display device, a variable winning ball device, a ball payout device, etc. provided in the game machine itself. In the process of transmitting a command signal to be controlled by another microcomputer, or a game machine control process), the count value of the random number for determination per normal symbol is one round (the random number for determination per normal symbol is taken). When the value is incremented by the number of values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the possible values), an initial value is set in the counter.

  When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes the timer interrupt process in steps S20 to S34 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-off detection process for detecting whether or not a power-off signal is output (whether or not an on-state is turned on) is executed (step S20). The power-off signal is output, for example, when a power supply monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a decrease in the voltage of the power supplied to the gaming machine. In the power-off detection process, when detecting that the power-off signal has been output, the CPU 56 executes a power supply stop process for saving necessary data in the backup RAM area. Next, detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 are input via the input driver circuit 58, and their state is determined (switch processing: step S21). ).

  Next, the CPU 56 has a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b, a normal symbol display 10, a first special symbol hold storage display 18a, a second special symbol hold storage display 18b, a normal symbol. A display control process for controlling the display of the on-hold storage display 41 is executed (step S22). About the 1st special symbol display 8a, the 2nd special symbol display 8b, and the normal symbol display 10, a drive signal is output with respect to each display according to the content of the output buffer set by step S32, S33. Execute control.

  Also, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each random number for determination such as a random number for determination per ordinary symbol used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: step S23). The CPU 56 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: steps S24 and S25).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol process processing (step S26). In the special symbol process, corresponding processing is executed according to a special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol indicator 8a, the second special symbol indicator 8b, and the special winning award in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Next, normal symbol process processing is performed (step S27). In the normal symbol process, the CPU 56 executes the corresponding process according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a process of sending an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (effect control command control process: step S28).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs information output processing for outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, probability variation information supplied to the hall management computer, for example (step S29).

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a prize ball process for setting the number of prize balls based on detection signals from the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a and the count switch 23 (step S30). Specifically, the payout control micro mounted on the payout control board 37 in response to the winning detection based on any one of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a and the count switch 23 being turned on. A payout control command (prize ball number signal) indicating the number of prize balls is output to the computer. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 97 in accordance with a payout control command indicating the number of winning balls.

  In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided. However, the CPU 56 relates to on / off of the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. The contents are output to the output port (step S31: output process).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol display control processing for setting special symbol display control data for effect display of the special symbol in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data according to the value of the special symbol process flag ( Step S32).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting normal symbol display control data for effect display of the normal symbol in the output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data according to the value of the normal symbol process flag ( Step S33).

  Thereafter, the interrupt permission state is set (step S34), and the process is terminated.

  With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 ms. The game control process corresponds to the processes in steps S21 to S33 (excluding step S29) in the timer interrupt process. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the timer interrupt process. However, in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is performed by the main process. May be executed.

  FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern of decorative symbols prepared in advance. As shown in FIG. 7, in this embodiment, the non-reach PA 1-1 to the non-reach are used as a variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “out of” and the decorative symbol variable display mode is “non-reach”. A variation pattern of reach PA1-4 is prepared. Further, normal PA2-1 to normal PA2-2, normal PB2-1 to normal PB2-2 are variations patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “out” and the decorative symbol variable display mode is “reach”. Fluctuation patterns of Super PA3-1 to Super PA3-2 and Super PB3-1 to Super PB3-2 are prepared. Note that, as shown in FIG. 7, re-variation is performed once for the variation pattern of the non-reach PA 1-4 that is used when the reach is not performed and is accompanied by a pseudo-continuous effect. The “pseudo-continuous” is a variation pattern in which an effect display is performed a predetermined number of times after the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in all symbol display areas, and then the decorative symbols are changed again (pseudo-continuous variation) in all symbol display areas. .

  Of the variation patterns used for reaching and accompanied by pseudo-rendition, when normal PB2-1 is used, re-variation is performed once. Of the variation patterns that are used for reaching and have a pseudo-continuous effect, when normal PB2-2 is used, re-variation is performed twice. Furthermore, when using super PA3-1 to super PA3-2 among the fluctuation patterns used for reaching and accompanied by pseudo-rendition effects, re-variation is performed three times. Note that the re-variation is to temporarily execute the variable display of the decorative symbol after temporarily stopping the decorative symbol that is temporarily off from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol until the display result is derived and displayed. .

  Further, as shown in FIG. 7, in this embodiment, normal PA2-3 to normal PA2-4, normal PB2 are used as variation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable symbol display result of the special symbol is a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol. -3 to Normal PB2-4, Super PA3-3 to SuperPA3-4, Super PB3-3 to Super PB3-4, Special PG1-1 to Special PG1-3, Special PG2-1 to Special PG2-2 Is prepared. In FIG. 7, the fluctuation patterns of special PG1-1 to special PG1-3 and special PG2-1 to special PG2-2 are used when a sudden appearance big hit, a sudden big hit, a 2R right variation big hit or a small hit. It is a fluctuation pattern. In addition, as shown in FIG. 7, among the fluctuation patterns that are used when the sudden appearance big hit, the sudden big hit, the 2R-probable big hit and the small hit are not used, and when the normal PB2-3 is used, Is performed once. Of the fluctuation patterns used for reaching and accompanied by pseudo-continuous effects, when normal PB2-4 is used, re-variation is performed twice. Furthermore, when using super PA3-3 to super PA3-4 among the fluctuation patterns that are used for reaching and have a pseudo-continuous effect, re-variation is performed three times. Further, for the fluctuation pattern of the special PG 1-3 used in the case of the sudden appearance big hit, the sudden big hit, the 2R positive variation big hit, or the small hit, the change is performed once.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7, the variation time is fixedly determined according to the type of reach (for example, the variation time is 32 in the case of Super Reach A with pseudo-ream). .75 seconds is fixed, and in the case of Super Reach A without pseudo-ream, the fluctuation time is fixed at 22.75 seconds.) For example, even in the case of the same type of Super Reach, the total pending storage Depending on the number, the variation time may be varied. Further, even when the same type of super reach is involved, the variation time may be shortened as the total number of pending storage increases. Even in the case of the same type of super reach, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, the variable time may be made different according to the first reserved memory number. When performing the variable display of symbols, the variable time may be varied according to the second reserved storage number. In that case, a separate determination table is prepared for each value of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number (for example, the variation pattern type determination table for the reserved memory numbers 0 to 2 and the reserved memory numbers 3 and 4 A variation pattern type determination table may be prepared), and a determination table may be selected according to the value of the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number to vary the variation time.

FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows.
(1) Random 1 (MR1): Determine the type of jackpot (type of jackpot) (for jackpot type determination)
(2) Random 2 (MR2): The type (type) of the variation pattern is determined (for variation pattern type determination)
(3) Random 3 (MR3): A variation pattern (variation time) is determined (for variation pattern determination)
(4) Random 4 (MR4): Determines whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination)
(5) Random 5 (MR5): Determine the initial value of random 4 (for determining the initial value of random 4)

  In this embodiment, the variation pattern is first determined using the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and then the variation pattern determined using the variation pattern determination random number (random 3). One of the variation patterns included in the pattern type is determined. Thus, in this embodiment, the variation pattern is determined by a two-stage lottery process.

  The variation pattern type is a group of a plurality of variation patterns according to the characteristics of the variation mode. For example, a plurality of variation patterns are grouped by reach type, and include a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with normal reach, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with super reach A, and a variation pattern with super reach B. It may be divided into variable pattern types. Further, for example, a plurality of variation patterns are grouped by the number of re-variations of pseudo-continuations, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern without pseudo-ream, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of one re-variation, It may be divided into a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of two variations and a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of three variations. Further, for example, a plurality of variation patterns may be grouped according to the presence / absence of a specific effect such as a pseudo ream or a slip effect.

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, in the case of 15R big hit (15R probability variation big hit and 15R normal big hit), normal CA3-1, which is a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern with only normal reach, and normal reach And normal CA3-2, which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with pseudo-continuations, and super CA3-3, which is a variation pattern type with super reach. In the case of 2R probability variation big hit, sudden appearance big hit or sudden big hit, special CA4-1 which is a variation pattern type including a non-reach variation pattern and a special CA4 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with reach. --2. Further, in the case of small hits, it is classified into special CA4-1 that is a variation pattern type including a non-reach variation pattern.

  Further, in the case of a deviation, it is a non-reach CA 2-1 that is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with no reach and a specific effect, and a variation pattern type that includes a change pattern with a specific effect without a reach. Non-reach CA2-2, non-reach CA2-3 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of shortened variation without reach and specific effects, and normal CA2-4 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with only normal reach And normal CA2-5 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with normal reach and two re-variation pseudo-continuations, and normal CA2 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with one normal reach and one re-variation pseudo-continuation -6 and super CA2-7 which is a variation pattern type with super reach Are the type divided into.

  In step S23 in the game control process shown in FIG. 6, the game control microcomputer 560 uses a counter for generating the jackpot type determination random number (1) and the random number for determination per ordinary symbol (4). Count up (add 1). That is, they are determination random numbers, and other random numbers are display random numbers (random 2, random 3) or initial value random numbers (random 5). In addition, in order to improve a game effect, you may use random numbers other than said random number. In this embodiment, a random number generated by hardware incorporated in the game control microcomputer 560 (or hardware external to the game control microcomputer 560) is used as the jackpot determination random number. Note that a software random number instead of a hardware random number may be used as the jackpot determination random number.

  FIG. 9A is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The jackpot determination table includes a normal-time jackpot determination table used in a normal state (a gaming state that is not a probability change state) and a probability change jackpot determination table used in a probability change state. Each numerical value described in the left column of FIG. 9 (A) is set in the normal jackpot determination table, and each numerical value described in the right column of FIG. 9 (A) is set in the probability variation big hit determination table. Is set. The numerical value described in FIG. 9A is a jackpot determination value.

  9B and 9C are explanatory diagrams showing a small hit determination table. The small hit determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a small hit determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The small hit determination table includes a small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) used when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, and a small hit determination table used when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. (For the second special symbol). Each value described in FIG. 9B is set in the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol), and in the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol), the values shown in FIG. Each numerical value listed is set. Moreover, the numerical values described in FIGS. 9B and 9C are small hit determination values.

  The CPU 56 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 503 at a predetermined time and sets the extracted value as the value of the big hit determination random number (random R). The big hit determination random number is shown in FIG. If it matches any of the jackpot determination values, it is decided to win a bonus for the special symbol. Further, when the big hit determination random number value matches one of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 9B and 9C, it is determined to make a small hit for the special symbol. Note that “probability” shown in FIG. 9A indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit. Further, the “probability” shown in FIGS. 9B and 9C indicates the probability (ratio) of making a small hit. Further, deciding whether or not to win a jackpot means deciding whether or not to shift to the jackpot gaming state. It also means deciding whether or not to make a jackpot symbol. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to shift to the small hit gaming state, but stopping in the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b. It also means determining whether or not the symbol is to be a small hit symbol.

  As shown in FIGS. 9B and 9C, when the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) is used, the small hit is determined at a ratio of 1/300, whereas the small hit determination table is used. In the case where the determination table (second special symbol) is used, a case where a small hit is determined at a ratio of 1/3000 will be described. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the start winning prize is given to the first start winning opening 13 and the first special symbol variation display is executed, the start winning prize is given to the second starting winning prize slot 14 and the second special symbol is displayed. The ratio determined as “small hit” is higher than when the variable display is executed.

  It should be noted that the small hit may be determined only when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, and the small hit may not be determined when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. In that case, the small hit determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is shifted to the time-shortening state, the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed. When the game state is a high base state, a small hit is generated, and when the stage is configured to cause the player to guess whether or not the high base state is reached, the current gaming state is Even though it is in a high base state, it makes the player feel annoying. However, if it is configured so that a small hit does not occur during the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, if the gaming state is a high base state, it is difficult for the small hit to occur and whether or not the probability change state is more than necessary. Thus, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed.

  FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 54. The jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 10 indicates that the jackpot type is determined based on a random number (random 1) for determining the jackpot type when the variable display result is determined to be a jackpot symbol. This table is referred to in order to determine any one of “2R-probability big hit”, “Crash probable big hit”, “Crash prone big hit”, and “15R probable big hit”.

  In this embodiment, as an example, the special symbol stop symbol is “1” when the 15R normal big hit is hit, and the special symbol stop symbol is “9” when the 2R probability variable big hit is hit. The stop symbol of the special symbol is “3”, the stop symbol of the special symbol is “5” when it is a sudden hit big hit, and the stop symbol of the special symbol is “7” when it becomes the 15R probability variable big hit. That is, the jackpot type and the special symbol stop symbol type correspond to each other.

  FIG. 10 (A) shows a case where the jackpot type is determined by using the hold memory based on the fact that the game ball has won the first start winning opening 13 (that is, when the first special symbol variation display is performed). A big hit type determination table (for a first special symbol at a low probability) is shown. FIG. 10 (B) shows a case where the jackpot type is determined using the hold memory based on the game ball having won the second start winning opening 14 (that is, when the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner). A big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol) is shown.

  In the high base state, there are more opportunities for the game ball to win the second start winning opening 14 than for the game ball to win the first start winning opening 13, so the second special symbol shown in FIG. There are many occasions where the big hit type determination table for use is used. Also, in the low base state, there is no opportunity for the game ball to win the second start winning opening 14, so the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 10 (A) is used.

  It should be noted that only when the variation display of the first special symbol is performed, it may be determined to be “surprise appearance big hit” and “surprise big hit”, and when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed, It may not be determined that the “accurate appearance big hit” and the “accurate big hit” are determined.

  Further, in this embodiment, a jackpot type is determined using a predetermined random number, but a special symbol stop symbol is determined using a predetermined random number, and the jackpot type is determined according to the determined special symbol type. It may be determined.

  In addition, when a special symbol stop symbol is determined using a predetermined random number, and a jackpot type is determined according to the determined special symbol type, one symbol or a plurality of symbols may be determined. Depending on the game state at that time, there may be a case where the game is shifted to the short time state after the end of the big hit game, or there is a case where it is not possible to shift to the time reduction state.

  11A and 11B are explanatory diagrams showing the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A and 132B. The jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A and 132B, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the variation pattern type is determined according to the determination result of the jackpot type and a random number for determining the variation pattern type. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types based on (Random 2). When the big hit type is 15R big hit, the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A is used, and when the big hit type is other big hits, the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132B is used.

  Each of the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A and 132B includes numerical values (determination values) to be compared with random number (random 2) values for variation pattern type determination, which are normal CA3-1 to normal CA3-2, A determination value corresponding to any one of the variation pattern types of super CA3-3, special CA4-1, and special CA4-2 is set.

  In addition, about the super reach big hit, the variation pattern type (a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of Super PA3-3 and Super PA3-4) with a pseudo-ream and the variation pattern type (a super PB3-3, It may be divided into a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of PB3-4.

  Further, in the big hit variation pattern type judgment table 132B used when the big hit type is other than 15R big hit, for example, when the big hit type such as special CA4-1 and special CA4-2 is 15R big hit, a determination value is assigned. A determination value is assigned to a variation pattern type that cannot be determined. Therefore, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “2R-probable big hit”, “probable big hit” or “surprise big hit”, it is possible to determine a variation pattern type different from the case of 15R big hit. it can.

  FIG. 11C is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit variation pattern type determination table 132C. The small hit variation pattern type determination table 132C has a plurality of types of variation pattern types based on a random number (random 2) for variation pattern type determination when the variable display result is determined to be a small hit symbol. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine any of the above. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11C, when it is determined to be a small hit, a case where the special CA4-1 is determined as the variation pattern type is shown. .

  12A to 12C are explanatory diagrams showing the variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C for deviation. FIG. 12A shows a loss variation pattern type determination table 135A used when the gaming state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is less than 3. FIG. 12B shows a loss variation pattern type determination table 135B used when the gaming state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is 3 or more. Also, FIG. 12C shows a variation pattern type determination table for deviation 135C used when the gaming state is in the short-time state (decision variation pattern type determination table 135C for probability variation / short-time: used also in the probability variation state. In some cases). The deviation variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C have a plurality of variation pattern types based on a random number (random 2) for variation pattern type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is an off symbol. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine any of the above.

  Each of the deviation variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135B includes a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number (random 2) value for variation pattern type determination, which is non-reach CA2-1 to non-reach CA2-. 3, a determination value corresponding to any one of the variation pattern types of normal CA2-4 to normal CA2-6 and super CA2-7 is set.

  In the example shown in FIG. 12, separate variation pattern type determination tables 135B and 135C for separate use are used for the case where the gaming state is the short-time state and the case where the total number of pending storages is 3 or more. It may be configured to use a common deviation variation pattern type determination table for the case where there is a case and the case where the total pending storage number is 3 or more. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 12C, one probability variation / short time deviation variation pattern type determination table 135 </ b> C is used, but the total number of pending storages as a variation variation type classification table for probability variation / short time states. It is also possible to use a plurality of variation pattern determination tables for deviation corresponding to the above (tables with different ratios of determination values).

  In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the deviation variation pattern type determination table 135A used when the total pending storage number is less than 3 and the total pending storage number is 3 or more. Two types of tables, the deviation variation pattern type determination table 135B used for the above, are used, but the method of dividing the deviation variation pattern type determination table is not limited to the method of division in this embodiment. For example, a separate deviation variation pattern type determination table may be prepared for each value of the total pending storage number. Further, for example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table corresponding to a combination of a plurality of other values stored in the total number of pending storages may be used. For example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table for the total pending storage number 0 to 2, for the total pending storage number 3, for the total pending storage number 4, and so on may be used.

  Also, in this embodiment, the deviation variation pattern type determination table corresponding to the total number of reserved storage is used, but the variation variation pattern type determination table corresponding to each of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is used. It may be used.

  Note that, as shown in FIGS. 12A and 12B, in this embodiment, when the game state is out of the normal state and the game state is the normal state, the value of the random number (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type Is 230 to 251, regardless of the total number of pending storage, variable display with at least super reach (super reach A, super reach B) is executed.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 12A and 12B, in this embodiment, when the game state is out of the normal state and the game state is the normal state, the value of the random number (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type If the value is 1 to 79, the fluctuation display of the normal fluctuation is executed at least without the reach (without the specific effect such as the pseudo-ream or the slide effect) regardless of the total number of reserved storage. In other words, in this embodiment, the determination table (displacement variation pattern type determination tables 135A and 135B) is applied to at least a part of variable display patterns other than the reach variable display pattern (variation pattern with reach). , Regardless of the number of reserved memories (first reserved memory number, second reserved memory number, combined reserved memory number) stored in the reserved storage means (first reserved memory buffer or second reserved memory buffer) Determination values (1 to 79 in the examples shown in FIGS. 12A and 12B) are assigned. Note that the “variable display pattern other than the reach variable display pattern” means, for example, that the variable display result is a big hit without a reach, a specific effect such as a pseudo-ream or a slide effect, as in this embodiment. It is a variable display pattern (variation pattern) used when it does not become a symbol.

  In this embodiment, when the total pending storage number is 3 or more, the shortening variation pattern type determination table shown in FIG. 12B is selected and the variation pattern of the shortening variation is determined. However, the threshold value of the total pending storage number (which may be the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number) when the variation pattern of the shortening variation can be selected according to the current gaming state may be made different. For example, when the gaming state is the normal state, when the total number of reserved memory is 3 (or when the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number is 2, for example), The variation pattern type determination table for loss is selected so that the variation pattern of the shortened variation may be determined. When the gaming state is a short-time state or a probable variation state, the total number of pending storages is smaller 1 or 2 (Or, for example, even when the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are smaller 0 or 1), the variation pattern type of shortening variation is selected by selecting the shortening variation pattern type determination table. It may be determined.

  13A and 13B are explanatory diagrams showing hit variation pattern determination tables 137A and 137B stored in the ROM 54. FIG. The hit fluctuation pattern determination tables 137A and 137B determine the fluctuation pattern according to the determination result of the big hit type or the fluctuation pattern type when it is determined that the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. This is a table that is referred to in order to determine a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on a random number (random 3).

  Each hit variation pattern determination table 137A, 137B is selected according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. That is, when it is determined that the variation pattern type is any one of normal CA3-1 to normal CA3-2 and super CA3-3, the hit variation pattern determination table 137A is selected. When it is decided to change the variation pattern type to either special CA4-1 or special CA4-2, the hit variation pattern determination table 137B is selected. Each hit variation pattern determination table 137A to 137B includes a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number (random 3) for variation pattern determination according to a variation pattern type, and a variable display result of a decorative pattern. Data (determination value) corresponding to any of a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the case where is a “big hit” is set.

  In the hit variation pattern determination table 137A shown in FIG. 13A, the variation pattern type includes normal CA3-1, which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with only normal reach, and variation patterns with normal reach and pseudo-continuity. It is classified into a normal CA3-2 which is a variation pattern type including a super CA3-3 and a super CA3-3 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern accompanied by a super reach (which may be accompanied by a pseudo-ream). In the hit variation pattern determination table 137B shown in FIG. 13B, the variation pattern type includes a special CA4-1 that is a variation pattern type including a non-reach variation pattern and a variation pattern type that includes a variation pattern with reach. Are classified into special CA4-2. In FIG. 13B, the variation pattern type may be divided according to the presence / absence of a specific effect such as a pseudo-ream or a slip effect, instead of being classified according to the presence / absence of reach. In that case, for example, the special CA 4-1 includes the special PG 1-1 and the special PG 2-1 which are the variation patterns not accompanied by the specific effect, and the special CA 4-2 is the special PG 1-2 accompanied by the specific effect. The special PG1-3 and the special PG2-2 may be included.

  FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram showing a deviation variation pattern determination table 138A stored in the ROM 54. As shown in FIG. When it is determined that the variable display result is “out of”, the deviation variation pattern determination table 138A is based on a random number (random 3) for variation pattern determination according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. It is a table referred to in order to determine any one of a plurality of types of variation patterns. The deviation variation pattern determination table 138A is selected as a usage table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type.

  FIG. 15 and FIG. 16 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560. In the example shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the command 80XX (H) is an effect control command (change time variable) for designating a variation pattern of a decorative symbol variably displayed on the effect display device 9 in response to variable display of a special symbol. (Variation pattern command including information) (corresponding to the variation pattern XX). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each of the usable variation patterns shown in FIG. 7, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each variation pattern specified by the number. “(H)” indicates a hexadecimal number. The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the start of variation. Therefore, when the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the command 80XX (H), the effect display device 9 controls the effect display device 9 to start variable display of decorative symbols.

  Commands 8C01 (H) to 8C07 (H) are effect control commands that can specify whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit, and a big hit type. The effect control microcomputer 100 determines the display result of the decorative symbols in response to the reception of the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C07 (H). Therefore, the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C07 (H) are referred to as display result designation commands.

  Command 8D01 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started. Command 8D02 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started. The first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command may be collectively referred to as a special symbol specifying command (or symbol variation designation command). Note that information indicating whether to start variable display of the first special symbol or variable display of the second special symbol may be included in the variation pattern command.

  The command 8E01 (H) is a normal symbol change start designation (hit) command indicating that the display result of the normal symbol is a win and starting the change of the normal symbol. The command 8E02 (H) is a normal command. This is a normal symbol variation start designation (deletion) command indicating that the symbol display result is a loss symbol and that the normal symbol variation is started.

  The command 8E04 (H) is a command (ordinary electric accessory release end designation command) transmitted when the variable winning ball device 15 is closed during the winning game based on the normal symbol hit. When the variable winning ball device 15 is released a plurality of times during the winning game based on the normal symbol hit, the normal electric accessory release end designation command is transmitted at the end of each opening. Further, the CPU 56 may transmit the normal electric accessory release end designation command only at the end of the last release among the plurality of opening of the variable winning ball device 15.

  Command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (symbol confirmation designation command) indicating that the variable display (variation) is terminated and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. When receiving the symbol confirmation designation command, the effect control microcomputer 100 ends the variable display (fluctuation) of the decorative symbols and derives and displays the display result.

  Command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power-on designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is resumed. When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the gaming control microcomputer 560 transmits a power failure recovery designation command if data is stored in the backup RAM, and if not, initialization designation is performed. Send a command.

  Command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

  Commands A001, A201, and A003 (H) are effect control commands for displaying a fanfare screen, that is, designating the start of a big hit game or a small hit game (hereinafter also referred to as a big hit start designation command or a fanfare designation command). . The effect control commands for designating the start of a big hit game or a small hit game include a big hit start 1 designation command, a big hit start 2 designation command, and a big hit start 3 / small hit start designation command corresponding to the type of big hit.

  The command A1XX (H) is an effect control command (special command during opening of a big winning opening) indicating a display during the opening of the big winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. A2XX (H) is an effect control command (designation command after opening the big winning opening) indicating the closing of the big winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

  The command A301 (H) is an effect control command (big hit / small hit end designation command) for displaying the big hit end screen or the small hit end screen, that is, the end of the big hit game or the small hit game.

  Command B001 (H) is an effect control command (low base state designation command) indicating that the gaming state is the low base state. Command B002 (H) is an effect control command (high base state designation command) indicating that the gaming state is the high base state. Command B003 (H) is an effect control command (non-probability change state designation command) indicating that the gaming state is not the probability change state. Command B004 (H) is an effect control command (probability change state designation command) indicating that the gaming state is a probability change state.

  The low base state designation command, the high base state designation command, the non-probability change state designation command, and the probability change state designation command may be collectively referred to as a gaming state designation command.

  Command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first reserved memory number addition designation command) that specifies that the first reserved memory number has increased by one. Command C100 (H) is an effect control command (second reserved memory number addition designation command) that specifies that the second reserved memory number has increased by one. Command C200 (H) is an effect control command (first reserved memory number subtraction designation command) that specifies that the first reserved memory number has decreased by one. Command C300 (H) is an effect control command (second reserved memory number subtraction designation command) that specifies that the second reserved memory number has decreased by one.

  In this embodiment, for the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number, an effect control command indicating that the reserved memory number has increased or decreased is transmitted, but the reserved memory number itself is designated. An effect control command may be transmitted. In this case, for example, an effect control command for designating which one of the first start prize opening 13 and the second start prize opening 14 is won is transmitted, and the reserved memory number designation command for designating the reserved memory number is designated as the first. A common effect control command is transmitted between the number of the first reserved memory and the number of the second reserved memory.

  Moreover, you may make it transmit a separate production control command (holding memory number designation | designated command) by the case where the 1st holding memory number is designated, and the case where the 2nd holding memory number is designated. In this case, for example, as a reserved memory number designation command, a value that can specify the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number as MODE data (for example, “C0 (H) when designating the first reserved memory number) ”And“ C1 (H) ”in the case of designating the second reserved memory number), and an effect control command in which the value of the reserved memory number is set as EXT data is transmitted.

  Further, for example, when the same first reserved memory number is designated, the MODE control data is made common, and the EXT data is made different so that an effect control command designating addition or subtraction of the first reserved memory number is transmitted. May be. For example, when the common MODE data “C0 (H)” is used and the subtraction of the first reserved memory number is designated, the command C000 (H) is transmitted, and the addition of the first reserved memory number is designated. The command C001 (H) may be transmitted. Further, when specifying the second reserved memory number, the MODE data is made different, and when specifying the subtraction of the second reserved memory number, the command C100 (H) is transmitted, and the second reserved memory number is determined. When adding is designated, the command C101 (H) may be transmitted.

  Command C4XX (H) is an effect control command (winning determination result designation command) indicating the content of the determination result at the time of winning (the result of the determination process executed when the start winning is generated). In this embodiment, in the winning determination process (see FIG. 27), the game control microcomputer 560 starts the winning prize when a starting prize is generated at the first starting prize port 13 or the second starting prize port 14. Based on this, determine whether to win. Then, a determination result is set in the EXT data of the determination result designation command at the time of winning, and control to transmit to the production control microcomputer 100 is performed.

  FIG. 17 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of a winning determination result specifying command. In the winning determination process, if it is determined that the game is lost, a winning determination result designation command (a winning determination result 1 designation command shown in FIG. 17) corresponding to the deviation is transmitted. When it is determined that the game is a big win, a winning judgment result designation command (a winning judgment result 2 designation command to a winning judgment result 6 designation command shown in FIG. 17) corresponding to the type of the big prize is transmitted. When it is determined that the game is a small hit, a winning determination result designation command (a winning determination result 7 designation command shown in FIG. 17) corresponding to the small hit is transmitted.

  In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not the big win is determined in the winning determination process, and transmits the determination result to the effect control microcomputer 100. In addition, a winning determination result designation command is sent according to which display result of the special symbol is displayed, and which determination value range of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is determined when starting winning. You may make it do.

  In that case, the production control microcomputer 100 can recognize the variation pattern type when the value of the random number for variation pattern type determination matches the predetermined determination value based on the winning determination result designation command, It can also be recognized whether or not the display result is a big hit symbol.

  In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 is common regardless of whether it is a start winning to the first start winning opening 13 or a start winning to the second starting winning opening 14. The winning determination result specifying command is transmitted, but different winning determination result specifying commands may be transmitted at the time of starting winning at the first starting winning port 13 and at the starting winning at the second starting winning port 14. Good. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 performs the production for the first reserved memory corresponding to the start winning for the first start winning opening 13 and the second winning corresponding to the start winning for the second start winning opening 14. It is possible to make a difference from the effect on the reserved memory.

  The command C8XX (H) is an effect control command (ordinary reserved memory number designation command) for designating the ordinary figure reserved memory number indicated by XX. In this embodiment, the number of ordinary symbols stored (the random number for random determination (random 4) extracted for the variation display of the ordinary symbols that have not yet started although the game ball has passed through the gate 32 is stored as the reserved memory. Number) is also referred to as a gate passing memory number.

  The effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the above-described effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31. Then, the display state of the effect display device 9 is changed according to the contents shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the display state of the lamp is changed, or the sound number data is output to the audio output board 70. To do.

  In this embodiment, the presentation control command has a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to “1”, and the first bit (bit 7) of the EXT data is always set to “0”. Note that such a command form is an example, and other command forms may be used. For example, a control command composed of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used.

  In addition, as a method of sending the production control command, production control command data is output from the main board 31 to the production control board 80 via the relay board 77 on the 8 parallel signal lines of the production control signals CD0 to CD7, In addition to the effect control command data, a method of outputting a pulse-shaped (rectangular wave-shaped) capture signal (effect control INT signal) for instructing capture of the effect control command data is used. The 8-bit effect control command data of the effect control command is output in synchronization with the effect control INT signal. The effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80 detects that the effect control INT signal has risen, and starts a 1-byte data capturing process through an interrupt process.

  Next, the normal symbol process (step S28) executed by the CPU 56 will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol process. In the normal symbol process, when detecting that the gate 32 is turned on, that is, the game ball has passed through the gate 32 (step S411), the CPU 56 executes a gate switch passage process (step S412). Thereafter, any one of steps S400 to S404 is executed.

  The processes in steps S400 to S404 are as follows.

  Normal symbol normal processing (step S400): The CPU 56 is in a state where normal symbol variation can be started (for example, the normal symbol change display is not being executed in the normal symbol display 10 and a variable prize is awarded). When the ball device 15 is not in the open state), the value of the gate passing memory number is confirmed. Specifically, the count value of the gate passing memory number counter is confirmed. If the gate passing memory number is not 0, it is determined whether or not to win (whether or not to stop the normal symbol as a winning symbol). Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (“1” in this example) indicating the normal symbol variation pattern setting process (step S401).

  Normal symbol variation pattern setting process (step S401): A normal symbol process is set by setting a value corresponding to a variable display time (variation time of a normal symbol) until a regular symbol is variably displayed and displayed. Start the timer. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (“2” in this example) corresponding to the normal symbol variation process (step S402).

  Normal symbol variation processing (step S402): The CPU 56 checks whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, stops the variation of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 10. In addition, the normal symbol process timer is started by setting a value corresponding to the normal symbol stop symbol display time in the normal symbol process timer, and the value of the normal symbol process flag is a value indicating the normal symbol stop time process (step S403) ( In this example, it is updated to “3”).

  Normal symbol stop process (step S403): The CPU 56 checks whether or not the normal symbol stop symbol is a winning symbol. If it is not a winning symbol (if it is a missing symbol), the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (“0” in this example) indicating the normal symbol normal process (step S400). If the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol, the normal symbol process timer is started by setting a value corresponding to the normal electric accessory operating time in the normal symbol process timer. Further, the variable winning ball apparatus (ordinary electric accessory) 15 is opened. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (in this example, “4”) indicating the process for releasing the normal electric accessory (step S404).

  Normal electric accessory opening process (step S404): When the normal symbol process timer times out, the CPU 56 closes the variable winning ball apparatus 15 and sets the value of the normal symbol process flag to the normal symbol normal process (step S400). It is updated to the value shown (in this example, “0”).

  FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a normal symbol hit determination table in which a determination value related to a normal symbol hit is set. In this embodiment, the range of random numbers for determination per ordinary symbol is 1 to 250. However, in the determination table for normal symbol, a determination value is set by comparing with the random number for determination per normal symbol.

  FIG. 19A shows a table used in the low base state. As shown in FIG. 19A, in the low base state, it is determined that there is a probability of 2/250. If it is determined that the winning is achieved, the variable winning ball apparatus (ordinary electric accessory) 15 is opened twice (the opening time for the first opening is 0.1 seconds, the opening time for the second opening is 5.3 seconds): The closing time (interval time) is 4.5 seconds). In the low base state, the normal symbol variation time (variable display time) is 10 seconds. However, a plurality of types of variation time may be prepared as the variation time of the normal symbol, and the CPU 56 may select the variation time to be used from among them. Further, a plurality of types or both of the number of opening times and the opening time of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 may be prepared, and the CPU 56 may select either or both of the number of opening times and the opening time.

  Hereinafter, the first opening (0.1 second opening) is referred to as short-term opening, and the second opening (5.3 seconds opening) may be referred to as long-term opening. In addition, the timing which alert | reports a predetermined effect ((circle)) or a predetermined effect (x) is after opening for a short period. Therefore, at the time when the short-term release is performed, it is not possible to grasp whether or not the long-term release is performed by executing the predetermined effect, and the player's expectation (relative to the long-term release) can be further enhanced . The predetermined effect is an effect of notifying whether or not the specific effect (reach effect) is executed in the special symbol or decorative symbol display, or whether or not the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in the open state. It is.

  FIG. 19B shows a table used in the high base state (short time state). As shown in FIG. 19B, in the high base state, it is determined that there is a probability of 249/250. When it is determined that the winning is achieved, the variable winning ball device (ordinary electric accessory) 15 is opened five times (the opening time of the first opening is 0.1 seconds, the closing time after the first opening is 0.1 seconds, 2 Each of the 5 open times is 1.36 seconds, and the interval time between 2 to 5 open times is 1.38 seconds). As described above, the first open mode of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is the same (both open for 0.1 seconds) in the case of hitting in the low base state and in the case of hitting in the high base state. The opening mode of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 after that is different. In the high base state, the normal symbol variation time (variable display time) is 1.5 seconds. As shown in FIG. 19, when the gaming state is in the low base state, it is a hit with a low probability, and when it is in the high base state, the probability is very high (in this example, it is approximately 100%, but it may be 100%). It ’s a hit.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 19A and 19B, in this embodiment, even when the normal symbol variation display result is out of place, it can be changed only once for a very short time of 0.1 second. The winning ball device 15 is opened.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 19, in the high base state, compared to the low base state, the probability that a normal symbol variation display result is a hit is increased. In the high base state, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is made open more frequently so as to make it easier to start and win, but this is not the only mode. For example, the probability that a normal symbol variation display result will be the same in the high base state and in the low base state is the same, but in the high base state, the low base state In comparison, by increasing the time during which the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the open state (normal electric accessory release time shown in FIG. 19), it is configured to facilitate the start winning in the high base state. May be. In that case, the number of times of opening is the same in the low base state and in the high base state. For example, the opening time of each opening time in the low base state is 0.1 seconds, 0.1 19 seconds, 0.1 seconds, and 5.3 seconds (when the number of times of opening is 4 times), and the opening time of each opening time in the high base state may be as shown in FIG. .

  Further, as shown in FIG. 19, the CPU 56 operates in the normal state (low base state: non-short-time state) in the total opening period in the winning gaming state (in the example shown in FIG. 19A, 0.1 seconds + 5.3 seconds). = 5.4 seconds) is shorter than the total open period in the high base state (short-time state) (in the example shown in FIG. 19B, 0.1 seconds + 1.36 seconds × 4 = 5.54 seconds). At the same time, the first opening period (0.1 second in the example shown in FIG. 19A) is shorter than the second opening period (5.3 seconds in the example shown in FIG. 19A). Control. Further, the CPU 56 has the longest release period in the low base state (FIG. 19B, in the example shown in FIG. 19B) in the hit base game state in the high base state. In the example shown in 19 (A), control is performed so that it is shorter than 5.3 seconds. Therefore, in the low base state, it is possible to give the player an impression as if it has been opened for a long period of time (because the first opening period is extremely short, the player may not notice the opening). As a result, it is possible to increase the player's expectation that the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in the open state in the low base state. Further, in the low base state, there may be a case where the terminal is opened only once for a short period (for example, opened for 0.1 seconds). In such a gaming machine, a player who notices that 0.1 second has been released cannot know whether or not to release for a long time at that time, and the player's sense of expectation for long-term opening Can be further enhanced.

  Further, the CPU 56 has a total non-opening period in the hit gaming state in the low base state (total of non-opening periods between a plurality of open states: 4.5 seconds in the example shown in FIG. 19A). Control is performed so as to be longer than the total non-opening period in the high base state (in the example shown in FIG. 19B, 0.1 seconds + 1.38 seconds × 3 = 4.24 seconds). Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the game balls from being excessively won in the variable winning device in the low base state and causing a disadvantage to the game store.

  On the other hand, in the low base state, it can be said that it is disadvantageous on average on the point that the total opening time is short compared to the case of the high base state, but it is not in the high base state for a long time (5.3 seconds). Since the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is released and there is a period during which the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is very easy to win, in this sense, the low base state includes a period more advantageous than the high base state. It can be said that.

  Further, in this embodiment, when a hit is made in a low base state, a long-term opening of 5.3 seconds is performed after an initial opening of 0.1 seconds and an interval period of 4.5 seconds. However, in this embodiment, as will be described later, when the first opening for 0.1 second is completed, the long-term opening notification image is displayed, and the opening for a long time is performed during the 4.5 second interval period. Will be notified. Then, the interval of 4.5 seconds and the long open period (5.3 seconds) is added to the variable winning ball apparatus 15 for a period of 9.8 seconds after the game ball is launched. It is set to a period sufficiently longer than the period X until reaching. With this configuration, in this embodiment, a player who recognizes that the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened for a long time when the long-term opening notification image is displayed fires a game ball. After that, a sufficient period is ensured until the launched game ball reaches the variable winning ball apparatus 15. Therefore, the period from the display of the long-term opening notification image to the time when the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the open state is too short, and the variable winning ball after the player recognizes the display of the long-term opening notification image. It is possible to prevent a situation in which a profit cannot be obtained in time even if the game ball is won in the device 15.

  The number of times of opening, the opening period, and the closing period (interval time) shown in FIG. 19 are examples, and the variable winning ball device 15 is opened a plurality of times in the winning gaming state, and the total opening period is in the high base state in the low base state. In the high base state, each open period in the hit gaming state is shorter than the longest open period in the low base state. In the low base state, if the total non-opening period in the hit gaming state is controlled to be longer than the total non-opening period in the high base state, the number of opening times, the opening period and the closing period shown in FIG. May use different times and durations.

  In the example shown in FIG. 19B, the first opening period in the high base state is shorter than the second and subsequent opening periods, but the first opening period in the high base state is shorter than the second and subsequent opening periods. It may be longer. Further, the opening period or the closing period of each time in the high base state may be variously changed on condition that the total opening period in the low base state is shorter than the total opening period in the high base state.

  FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the gate switch passage processing. In the gate switch passage processing, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the count value (gate passage storage number) of the gate passage storage counter has reached the maximum value (“4” in this example) (step S415). If the maximum value has not been reached, the CPU 56 increments the count value of the gate passing memory counter by 1 (step S416), extracts the value of the random number for normal symbol determination (random 4), which is a software random number, and stores the gate passing memory. The data is stored in a storage area corresponding to the number value (a general-purpose holding storage buffer provided in the RAM 55) (step S417). Further, the CPU 56 increases the number of lighting of the normal symbol hold storage display 41 by 1 (step S418). In addition, the CPU 56 sets the value of the gate passage storage counter after addition in step S416 (that is, the number of reserved universal memory numbers) in the EXT data, and transmits a command for specifying the reserved memory number of ordinary drawings to the effect control microcomputer 100. Control is performed (step S419).

  In the normal symbol normal process in step S400, the CPU 56 is in a state in which the normal symbol can be changed, and if the number of stored gate passages is not zero, the CPU 56 stores the symbol in the storage area (ordinary symbol holding storage buffer). It is determined whether or not to win (whether or not to stop the normal symbol as a winning symbol) using the value of the random number for determining the normal symbol and the normal symbol determining table shown in FIG. To do. That is, when the value of the random number for determination per normal symbol matches any of the determination values (determination values corresponding to the hit) set in the determination table per normal symbol, it is determined as a win. If it is determined that the game is a hit, the normal symbol hit flag is set. The CPU 56 uses the table shown in FIG. 19A if the gaming state is in the low base state (if the hourly flag is not set), and if it is in the high base state (if the hourly flag is set). If so, the table shown in FIG. 19B is used. In this embodiment, the fact that the normal symbol variation display result is a win is also expressed as a win. Further, in this embodiment, the fact that the fluctuation display result of the normal symbol is out of order is also expressed as out of normal.

  FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation pattern setting process (step S401) in the normal symbol process. In the normal symbol variation pattern setting process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the current gaming state is a high base state (step S431). Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the time reduction flag is set. If it is in the high base state, a value corresponding to 1.5 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer (step S432). In the low base state, a value corresponding to 10 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer (step S433).

  Further, when the normal symbol normal process is determined to win (when the normal symbol per flag is set) (step S434), it is determined that the display result of the normal symbol is used and the normal symbol is displayed. Control is performed to transmit a normal symbol variation start designation (hit) command indicating the start of symbol variation to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S435). A normal symbol change start (out) command indicating that the normal symbol display result is determined to be off and normal symbol variation starts when the normal symbol normal processing is determined to be off. Is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S436).

  Next, the CPU 56 decrements the count value of the gate passage storage counter by -1 (step S437), sets the value of the gate passage storage counter after the subtraction (that is, the number of reserved common memory) to EXT data, Control is performed to transmit the memory number designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S438).

  Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically “2”) corresponding to the normal symbol variation process (step S402) (step S439).

  When transmitting an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100, the CPU 56 sets the address of a command transmission table (preliminarily set for each command in the ROM) corresponding to the effect control command as a pointer. . And the address of the command transmission table according to an effect control command is set to a pointer, and an effect control command is transmitted in an effect control command control process (step S28).

  In this embodiment, the normal symbol variation start setting command and the common symbol reserved memory number designation command are transmitted in the normal symbol variation pattern setting process. However, in the normal symbol variation processing of step S400, the normal symbol variation process is performed. After determining whether or not to win the display result, send a normal symbol variation start designation command, or send a universal figure pending memory number designation command by decrementing the count value of the gate passing memory counter. You may make it do.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation process (step S402). In the normal symbol variation process, the CPU 56 checks whether the value of the normal symbol process timer has reached 0, that is, whether the normal symbol process timer has timed out (step S441). If the normal symbol process timer has not timed out (N in step S441), the CPU 56 decrements the value of the normal symbol process timer by -1 (step S445).

  When the normal symbol process timer times out, that is, when the normal symbol variation time has elapsed (Y in step S441), the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a normal symbol variation end designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100. Along with (Step S442), the normal symbol stop symbol display time is set in the normal symbol process timer (Step S443). Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value (specifically “3”) indicating the normal symbol stop process (step S403) (step S444).

  FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol stop process (step S403). In the normal symbol stop process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the normal symbol process timer has reached 0, that is, whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out (step S451). If the normal symbol process timer has not timed out, the value of the normal symbol process timer is decremented by 1 (step S452).

  When the normal symbol process timer has timed out, that is, when the normal symbol stop symbol display time has elapsed, the CPU 56 has a value corresponding to the normal electric utility operating time (0.1 second) of the normal symbol process timer opened for the first time. Is set (step S454). In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 19, regardless of whether the game is a normal game or a normal game, the game state is a high base state (short time state) or a low base state. Regardless of whether or not (non-short-time state), the first opening mode of the variable winning ball device 15 is the same, so the CPU 56 sets a value corresponding to 0.1 seconds regardless of the gaming state.

  Further, the CPU 56 opens the variable winning ball device (ordinary electric accessory) 15 (step S455), and sets the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value indicating the normal electric accessory releasing process (step S404). Is updated to "4") (step S456).

  The CPU 56 subtracts the value of the normal symbol process timer by 1 in the process during opening of the normal electric accessory, and when the value of the normal symbol process timer becomes 0, the variable winning ball apparatus (ordinary electric accessory) 15 is closed. To do. When the final opening of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is completed, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically “0”) indicating the normal symbol normal process (step S400). If it is not the last time, the CPU 56 sets a value corresponding to the next normal electric accessory operating time (opening period of the variable winning ball device 15 (see FIG. 19)) in the normal symbol process timer, and again, The variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened. The CPU 56 does not immediately open the variable winning ball device 15 but opens it when a predetermined interval time (see FIG. 19) elapses. In the case of an unusual figure, the operation of the variable winning ball device 15 is terminated by simply releasing the short time of 0.1 seconds, and the value of the normal symbol process flag is changed to the normal symbol normal processing. (Step S400) is updated to a value (specifically “0”).

  Further, when the variable winning ball apparatus (ordinary electric accessory) 15 is closed in the normal electric accessory opening process, the CPU 56 uses a normal electric accessory opening end designation command (see FIG. 15) for effect control. Control to transmit to the microcomputer 100 is performed.

  In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 does not transmit an effect control command relating to the open state of the variable winning ball device 15, but indicates closing when the open state of the variable winning ball device 15 ends. An effect control command may be transmitted. When the game control microcomputer 560 performs control so that the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is closed when there is a predetermined number of winnings even if the opening time has not elapsed, the effect controlling microcomputer 100 still has the variable winnings. Although it is recognized that the ball device 15 is open, a situation occurs in which the variable winning ball device 15 is actually closed. However, in this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 is configured to notify that the variable winning ball device 15 is closed, so that the notification is terminated based on the production control command indicating the closing. Can do.

  FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process (step S26) program executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. In the special symbol process, a process for controlling the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the special winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process, the CPU 56 executes a start port switch passing process (step S321). Further, any one of steps S300 to S310 is performed according to the value of the special symbol process flag.

  The processes in steps S300 to S310 are as follows.

  Special symbol normal processing (step S300): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is zero. When the game control microcomputer 560 is in a state where variable display of the special symbol can be started, the game control microcomputer 560 checks the number of numerical data stored in the reserved storage number buffer (total number of reserved storage). The stored number of numerical data stored in the pending storage number buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total pending storage number counter. If the count value of the total pending storage number counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit. In case of big hit, set big hit flag. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) according to step S301. The jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends.

  Fluctuation pattern setting process (step S301): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1. Also, the variation pattern is determined, and the variation time in the variation pattern (variable display time: the time from the start of variable display until the display result is derived and displayed (stop display)) is defined as the variation display variation time of the special symbol. Decide to do. Also, a variable time timer for measuring the special symbol variable time is started. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (2 in this example) corresponding to step S302.

  Display result designation command transmission process (step S302): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 2. Control for transmitting a display result designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (3 in this example) corresponding to step S303.

  Special symbol changing process (step S303): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 3. When the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern setting process elapses (the variation time timer set in step S301 times out, that is, the variation time timer value becomes 0), the design control microcomputer 100 determines the symbol. Control to transmit the specified command is performed, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (4 in this example) corresponding to step S304. The effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 to stop the decorative symbols when receiving the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560.

  Special symbol stop process (step S304): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. After the display result of the special symbol is derived and displayed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S305 (5 in this example) when the big hit flag is set. If the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S308. If neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S300 (in this example, 0).

  Preliminary winning opening opening process (step S305): This is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 5. In the pre-opening process for the big prize opening, control for opening the big prize opening is performed. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the big prize opening (first big prize opening). To do. Alternatively, the motor 24 is driven to open the movable member 76 that forms the big prize opening (second big prize opening). Also, the execution time of the special prize opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S306 (6 in this example). The pre-opening process for the big winning opening is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the pre-opening process for the big winning opening is also a process for starting the big hit game.

  Large winning opening opening process (step S306): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. A control for transmitting a presentation control command for round display during the big hit gaming state to the microcomputer 100 for the presentation control, a process for confirming that the closing condition for the big prize opening is satisfied, and the like are performed. If the closing condition for the special prize opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. When all the rounds are completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S307 (7 in this example).

  Big hit end process (step S307): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. Control is performed to cause the microcomputer 100 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. In addition, a process for setting a flag indicating a gaming state (for example, a probability change flag or a time reduction flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  Small hit release pre-processing (step S308): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 8. In the pre-opening process for small hits, control is performed to open the big winning opening (second big winning opening). Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the big prize opening. Also, the execution time of the special prize opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S309 (9 in this example). It should be noted that although the pre-opening process for small hits is executed for each round, the pre-opening process for small hits is also a process for starting a small hit game when starting the first round.

  Small hit release processing (step S309): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 9. Processing to confirm the establishment of the closing condition of the big prize opening is performed. If the closing condition for the big prize opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S308 (8 in this example). When all rounds are completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S310 (in this example, 10 (decimal number)).

  Small hit end process (step S310): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 10. Control is performed to cause the microcomputer 100 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the small hit gaming state has ended. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the start port switch passing process in step S321.

  In the start port switch passing process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the first start port switch 13a is turned on (step S211A). If the first start port switch 13a is on, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the first reserved memory number counter for counting the first reserved memory number is 4 which is the upper limit value (step). S212A). If the value of the first reserved memory number counter is 4, the process proceeds to step S211B.

  If the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 (step S213A), and the value of the total reserved memory number counter for counting the total reserved memory number Is increased by 1 (step S214A). Next, the CPU 56 extracts values from the random number circuit 503 and a counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in the storage area in the first reserved storage buffer (see FIG. 26) (step S215A). . In the process of step S215A, random R (big hit determination random number) which is a hardware random number, big hit type determination random number (random 1) which is a software random number, random number for variation pattern type determination (random 2), and variation pattern determination A random number (random 3) is extracted and stored in the storage area. Note that the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) and the variation pattern determination random number (random 3) are not extracted and stored in advance in the storage area in the start port switch passing process (at the time of start winning). You may make it extract at the time of the change start of 1 special symbol. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may extract a value from a variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) in a variation pattern setting process described later.

  FIG. 26 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of an area (hold buffer) for storing random numbers and the like corresponding to the hold memory. As shown in FIG. 26, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the first reserved storage number is secured in the first reserved storage buffer. In addition, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number (4 in this example) is secured in the second reserved storage buffer. The first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55. Being formed in the RAM means an area in the RAM.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs a winning determination process (step S216A). Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the first reserved memory number addition designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S217A).

  When transmitting an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100, the CPU 56 sets the address of a command transmission table (preliminarily set for each command in the ROM) corresponding to the effect control command as a pointer. . And the address of the command transmission table according to an effect control command is set to a pointer, and an effect control command is transmitted in an effect control command control process (step S28).

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the second start port switch 14a is turned on (step S211B). If the second start port switch 14a is on, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the second reserved memory number counter for counting the second reserved memory number is 4 which is the upper limit value (step). S212B). If the value of the second reserved memory number counter is 4, the process is terminated.

  If the value of the second reserved memory number counter is not 4, the CPU 56 increases the value of the second reserved memory number counter by 1 (step S213B) and increases the value of the total reserved memory number counter by 1 (step S214B).

  Then, the CPU 56 extracts values from the random number circuit 503 and a counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in the storage area in the second reserved storage buffer (step S215B). In the process of step S215B, a random R (big hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number, a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and a variation pattern determination A random number (random 3) is extracted and stored in the storage area. Note that the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) and the variation pattern determination random number (random 3) are not extracted and stored in advance in the storage area in the start port switch passing process (at the time of start winning). You may make it extract at the time of the change start of 2 special symbols. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may extract a value from a variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) in the variation pattern setting process.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs a winning determination process (step S216B). Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the second reserved memory number addition designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S217B).

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the winning determination process in steps S216A and S216B.

  In this embodiment, at the timing when the variation of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is started, whether or not to make a big hit in the special symbol normal processing and the type of big hit are determined. Even at the timing of starting winning at the second starting winning opening 14, before the display of fluctuation based on the starting winning is started, it is determined in advance whether or not it will be a big hit by executing the winning determination process shown in FIG. To do. Then, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes a predetermined notice effect for notifying that it will be a big hit.

  In the determination process at the time of winning, when it is determined in advance which range the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type falls, that is, before the variation display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is executed. When the variation pattern type is determined in advance, based on the determination result at the time of winning a prize, the effect control microcomputer 100 notifies that it will become super reach in addition to the notice effect for notifying that it will be a big hit. The announcement effect for doing can also be performed.

  In the winning determination process, the CPU 56 first compares the jackpot determination random number (random R) extracted in the processes of steps S215A and S215B with the normal jackpot determination value shown in the left column of FIG. It is confirmed whether or not they match (step S220). If it matches the big hit determination value, the process proceeds to step S223. If it is confirmed in step S220 that the jackpot determination random number (random R) does not match the normal jackpot determination value, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the probability change flag indicating that the gaming state is the probability change state is set. (Step S221). When the probability change flag is set, the jackpot determination random number (random R) extracted by the processing of steps S215A and S215B is compared with the jackpot determination value at the time of probability change shown in the right column of FIG. It is confirmed whether or not they match (step S222). If they match, the process proceeds to step S223.

  In step S223, the CPU 56 determines the jackpot type based on the jackpot type determination random number (random 1) extracted in the processes of steps S215A and S215B and stored in the reserved storage buffer. In step S223, when there is a start winning at the first start winning opening 13 (when the process of step S216A is executed in the start opening switch passing process shown in FIG. 25), the CPU 56 selects FIG. ) Is used to determine the big hit type ("15R normal big hit", "2R probable big hit", "surprise masquerade big hit", "rush probable big hit" or "15R probable big hit"). judge. When there is a start winning at the second start winning opening 14 (when the process of step S216B is executed in the start opening switch passing process shown in FIG. 25), the jackpot type shown in FIG. The jackpot type is determined using the determination table (for the second special symbol).

  Then, the value of the EXT data set in the winning determination result designation command shown in FIG. 17 is set in accordance with the type of jackpot (step S224). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S231.

  When it is confirmed in step S222 that the jackpot determination random number (random R) does not match the jackpot determination value at the time of probability change, the CPU 56 determines that the jackpot determination random number (random R) is one of the small hit determination values. (Step S228). If it does not coincide with any of the small hit determination values, the process proceeds to step S230.

  If it matches the small hit determination value, the value of the EXT data set in the winning determination result designation command shown in FIG. 17 is set to a value corresponding to the small hit (step S229). Then, the process proceeds to step S231.

  If it does not coincide with the small hit determination value, the value of the EXT data set in the winning determination result designation command is set to a value corresponding to the deviation (step S230). Then, the process proceeds to step S231.

  In step S231, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a winning determination result designation command in which EXT data is set to the effect control microcomputer 100.

  28 and 29 are flowcharts showing the special symbol normal process (step S300) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 56 confirms the value of the total pending storage number (step S51). Specifically, the count value of the total pending storage number counter is confirmed. If the total pending storage number is 0, control is performed to transmit a customer waiting demonstration designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S51A), and the process ends.

  Note that the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a customer waiting demonstration designation command when a predetermined time (for example, 1 minute) has elapsed since the value of the total pending storage number becomes 0 in the process of step S51A. In order to realize such control, for example, the CPU 56 starts a predetermined timer when the value of the total pending storage number becomes 0, and when the value of the total pending storage number changes to 1, However, when the timer value does not stop and the timer value reaches a predetermined value, control is performed to transmit a customer waiting demonstration designation command.

  If the total reserved memory number is not 0, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the second reserved memory number is 0 (step S52). Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the second reserved memory number counter is zero. If the second reserved memory number is not 0, the CPU 56 has a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process is being performed for the first special symbol or the special symbol process is being performed for the second special symbol). Is set to data indicating “second” (step S53). If the second reserved storage number is 0, the CPU 66 sets data indicating “first” in the special symbol pointer (step S54).

  By executing the processing of steps S52 to S54, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variation display of the first special symbol. That is, control is performed so that the second start condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is established in preference to the first start condition for starting the variable display of the first special symbol.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 55 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55 (step S55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 determines each disturbance stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = 1 in the first reserved memory number buffer. The numerical value is read and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 reads each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = 1 in the second reserved memory number buffer. And stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55.

  Then, the CPU 56 decrements the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 decrements the count value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 and saves each storage area in the first reserved memory number buffer. Shift the contents of. When the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the count value of the second reserved memory number counter is decremented by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second reserved memory number buffer are shifted.

  That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 saves the first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 55. Are stored in a storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n−1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, it is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 55. Each random number value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n−1.

  Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved memory number (or each second reserved memory number) is extracted is always the first reserved memory number (or (Second reserved storage number) = 1, 2, 3, 4 in order.

  Then, the CPU 56 decreases the number of lighting of the special symbol reservation storage display (the first special symbol reservation storage display 18a or the second special symbol reservation storage display 18b) indicated by the special symbol pointer by 1 (step S57). Further, the value of the reserved memory number counter (the first reserved memory number counter or the second reserved memory number counter) indicated by the special symbol pointer is decremented by 1 (step S58). In addition, the value of the total pending storage number is decreased by one. That is, 1 is subtracted from the count value of the total pending storage number counter (step S59).

  Next, the CPU 56 reads a random R (a jackpot determining random number) from the random number buffer area and determines whether or not to make a jackpot. That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot determination random number matches one of the jackpot determination values (see FIG. 8) set in the jackpot determination table (step S61). The CPU 56 reads out the big hit determination random number extracted in step S215A of the first start port switch passing process or step S215B of the second start port switch passing process and stored in advance in the first hold memory buffer or the second hold memory buffer. The jackpot determination (processing for comparing the value of the random number for determining the jackpot with the jackpot determination value) is performed. Specifically, according to the current gaming state, the CPU 56 determines a big hit for the special symbol when the value of the random number for random determination (random R) matches any of the big hit determination values shown in FIG. Decide on.

  Note that whether or not the current gaming state is the probability variation state is determined by whether or not the probability variation flag is set. The probability variation flag is set when the gaming state is shifted to the probability variation state, and is reset when the probability variation state is terminated. Specifically, it is set in the process of ending the big hit game after it has been decided to be 15R probability variable big hit, sudden appearance big hit or sudden big hit, and when the big hit is decided, the special symbol variation display is terminated and stopped. It is reset when the symbol is stopped and displayed.

  If it is decided to win, the process proceeds to step S65. Note that deciding whether to win or not is to decide whether or not to shift to the big hit gaming state, but to decide whether or not to stop the special symbol display as a big hit symbol. But there is.

  When it is confirmed in step S61 that the value of random R (random number for jackpot determination) does not match any of the jackpot determination values, the CPU 56 checks the small hit determination table (see FIGS. 9B and 9C). ) Is used to determine the small hits. That is, when the value of the big hit determination random number matches one of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 9B and 9C, the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol is a small hit. When the value of the random R does not match the small hit determination value, that is, when it is out of place, the process proceeds to step S73. In the process of step S62, the CPU 56 confirms the data indicated by the special symbol pointer. If the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is “first”, the small hit determination table (FIG. 9B) ( The first special symbol) is used to decide whether or not to make a small hit. If the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is “second”, it is determined whether or not to make a small hit using the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 9C. .

  Then, when the value of the big hit determination random number coincides with any of the small hit determination values (step S62), that is, when it is determined to be the small hit, the CPU 56 determines that it is a small hit. The small hit flag shown is set (step S63), and the process proceeds to step S73.

  In step S65, the CPU 56 sets a big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit. Then, the jackpot type determination table indicated by the special symbol pointer is selected as a table used to determine the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types (step S66). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 selects the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. When the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 selects the big hit type determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG.

  Next, the CPU 56 uses the selected jackpot type determination table to select a type corresponding to the value of the random number (random 1) for determining the big hit type stored in the random number buffer area (“15R normal big hit”, “ "2R probability variation big hit", "surprise masquerade big hit", "crash probability big hit", "15R probability variation big hit") are determined as the types of big hit (step S67).

  Further, the CPU 56 sets data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 55 (step S68). For example, when the big hit type is “15R normal big hit”, “01” is set as the data indicating the big hit type, and when “2R probability variable big hit” is set, “02” is set as the data indicating the big hit type. “03” is set as the data indicating the big hit type in the case of “Crash hit big hit”, “04” is set as the data showing the big hit type in the case of “Crush big hit”, and “15R probability variable big hit” is set. Is set to “05” as data indicating the big hit type.

  Next, the CPU 56 determines a special symbol stop symbol (step S73). Specifically, when the big hit flag and the small hit flag are not set, “−” which is the off symbol is determined as a special symbol stop symbol. When the jackpot flag is set, depending on the determination result of the jackpot type, one of the jackpot symbols “1”, “3”, “5”, “7”, “9” is set as a special symbol. Decide on a stop symbol. That is, when the jackpot type is determined as “15R normal jackpot”, “1” is determined as a special symbol stop symbol. When “2R probability variation big hit” is determined, “9” is determined as a special symbol stop symbol. If it is determined to be “Accurate masquerade jackpot”, “5” is determined as a special symbol stop symbol. If it is determined to be “successful big hit”, “3” is determined as a special symbol stop symbol, and if “15R probability variable big hit” is determined, “7” is determined as a special symbol stop symbol. If the small hit flag is set, the small hit symbol “2” is determined as a special symbol stop symbol.

  In this embodiment, the case where the jackpot type is first determined and the stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the determined jackpot type is shown, but the method for determining the jackpot type and the stop symbol of the special symbol is as follows. The method is not limited to the method in the embodiment. For example, a table in which a special symbol stop symbol and a jackpot type are associated in advance is prepared, and when a special symbol stop symbol is first determined based on the random number for determining the big hit type, the corresponding jackpot is determined based on the determination result. You may comprise so that a classification may also be determined.

  Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S301) (step S74).

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern setting process (step S301) in the special symbol process. In the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S91). When the big hit flag is set, the CPU 56 uses the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A and 132B (FIG. 11 (A) as tables used for determining the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types. ) Or (B)) is selected (step S92). Then, the process proceeds to step S102.

  When the big hit flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S93). When the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 uses the small hit variation pattern type determination table 132C (FIG. 11C) as a table used to determine the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types. )) Is selected (step S94). Then, the process proceeds to step S102.

  When the small hit flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the time reduction flag indicating that the time reduction state is set (step S95). The time reduction flag is set when the gaming state is shifted to the time reduction state (including the time of shifting to the probability change state), and is reset when the time reduction state is ended. If the time reduction flag is set, the CPU 56 proceeds to step S99.

  When the time reduction flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the total pending storage number is 3 or more (step S96). If the total number of pending storages is less than 3, the CPU 56 uses the variation pattern type determination table 135A (see FIG. 12A) as a table used to determine the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types. ) Is selected (step S97). Then, the process proceeds to step S102.

  When the total pending storage number is 3 or more, the CPU 56 uses the variation pattern type determination table 135B for deviation as a table to be used for determining one of a plurality of variation pattern types (FIG. 12B )) Is selected (step S98). Then, the process proceeds to step S102.

  When the time reduction flag is set, the CPU 56 uses the deviation variation pattern type determination table 135C (see FIG. 12C) as a table used for determining one of a plurality of variation pattern types. ) Is selected (step S99). Then, the process proceeds to step S102.

  In this embodiment, when the total number of pending storages is 3 or more by executing the processes of steps S95 to S99, the variation pattern type determination table 135B for loss shown in FIG. 12B is selected. The Further, when the gaming state is the short-time state, the deviation variation pattern type determination table 135C shown in FIG. 12C is selected. In this case, non-reach CA2-3 may be determined as the variation pattern type in the process of step S102, and when the variation pattern type of non-reach CA2-3 is determined, the process is performed as a variation pattern in step S105. Short reach fluctuation non-reach PA1-2 is determined (see FIG. 14). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is a short-time state or when the total number of pending storage is 3 or more, a change display of the shortening variation may be performed. In this embodiment, the variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation used in the short time state (see FIG. 12C) and the variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation based on the number of reserved storage (FIG. 12B ))) Is a different table, but a common table may be used as a variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation.

  In this embodiment, even if the gaming state is a short-time state, if the total number of pending storage is almost 0 (for example, 0, 0, or 1), the shortened The fluctuation display of fluctuation may not be performed. In this case, for example, when the CPU 56 determines in step S95 that the time reduction flag is set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the total pending storage number is almost zero. The deviation variation pattern type determination table 135A (see FIG. 12A) may be selected.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads random 2 (random number for variation pattern type determination) from the random number buffer area (the first reserved storage buffer or the second reserved storage buffer) and selects it in the process of steps S92, S94, S97, S98 or S99. By referring to the table, the variation pattern type is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S102).

  Next, the CPU 56 uses the hit variation pattern determination tables 137A and 137B (see FIG. 13) as tables used to determine the variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on the determination result of the variation pattern type in step S102. ), One of the deviation variation pattern determination table 138A (see FIG. 14) is selected (step S103). Further, the random pattern 3 (random number for variation pattern determination) is read from the random number buffer area (first reserved storage buffer or second reserved storage buffer), and the variation pattern is determined by referring to the variation pattern determination table selected in step S103. Is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S105). When the random number 3 (variation pattern determination random number) is not extracted at the start winning timing, the CPU 56 uses the variation pattern determination random number counter for generating the variation pattern determination random number (random 3). It is also possible to extract the value directly from and to determine the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the symbol variation designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S106). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a first symbol variation designation command. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a second symbol variation designation command. Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit an effect control command (variation pattern command) corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S107).

  Next, the CPU 56 sets a value corresponding to the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern in the variation time timer formed in the RAM 55 (step S108). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the display result designation command transmission process (step S302) (step S109).

  In the case where it is determined to be out of place, instead of determining the variation pattern type regardless of the reach, it is first determined whether or not to reach by the lottery process using the random number for reach determination. Good. Then, based on the determination result as to whether or not to reach, the processing of steps S95 to S99 and S102 may be executed to determine the variation pattern type. In this case, a non-reach variation pattern type determination table (including non-reach CA2-1 to non-reach CA2-3 variation pattern types shown in FIG. 12) and a reach variation pattern type determination table (FIG. 12). Normal CA2-4 to normal CA2-6, including a variation pattern type of super CA2-7) are prepared, and one of the variation pattern type determination tables is selected based on the reach determination result. The variation pattern type may be determined.

  In addition, when determining whether or not to reach by a lottery process using a reach determination random number, depending on the total reserved memory number (which may be the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number), Reach determination tables having different selection ratios may be selected, and it may be determined whether or not to reach so that the reach probability decreases as the number of reserved memories increases. In this case, for example, in determining whether or not “super reach out” or “non-reach out” in the winning determination process, the CPU 56 matches the determination value assigned to the common range in the reach determination table. It may be determined in advance whether or not to reach by determining whether or not.

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the display result designation command transmission process (step S302). In the display result designation command transmission process, the CPU 56 transmits a display result designation command (see FIG. 15) of any one of the display result 1 designation to the display result 7 designation according to the determined type of jackpot or loss. I do. Specifically, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S111). If not set, the process proceeds to step S113. When the jackpot flag is set, control is performed to transmit a display result designation command (any one of display result 2 designation command to display result 5 designation command) according to the type of jackpot (step SS112). Then, the process proceeds to step S116.

  In step S113, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set. When the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 7 designation command (step S114). When the small hit flag is not set, that is, when it is out of place, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 1 designation command (step S115). Then, the process proceeds to step S116.

  In step S116, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the reserved memory number subtraction designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the effect control microcomputer 100. In step S116, when a value indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a first reserved memory number subtraction designation command. Further, when a value indicating “second” is set in the special symbol pointer, control for transmitting the second reserved memory number subtraction designation command is performed.

  Further, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol changing process (step S303) (step S117).

  FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the special symbol changing process (step S303) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol changing process, in the special symbol changing process, the CPU 56 decrements the variable time timer by 1 (step S125), and when the variable time timer times out (step S126), the special symbol stop time pattern is derived and displayed. (Step S127), control is performed to transmit a symbol confirmation designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 (Step S128). Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop process (step S304) (step S129). If the variable time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

  FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop process (step S304) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S133). If the big hit flag is set, the CPU 56 resets the probability change flag indicating the probability change state and the time reduction flag indicating the time reduction state if set (step S134). Control to send a big hit start designation command to the microcomputer 100 is performed (step S135). Specifically, when the type of jackpot is 15R normal jackpot, a jackpot start 1 designation command is transmitted. When the jackpot type is 15R probability variable jackpot, a jackpot start 2 designation command is transmitted. When the type of the big hit is a fake big hit or a sudden big hit, a big hit start 3 / small hit designation command is transmitted. The jackpot type is determined by data indicating the jackpot type stored in the RAM 55 (data stored in the jackpot type buffer).

  In addition, a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (a time for which the effect display device 9 notifies that the jackpot has occurred, for example) is set in the jackpot display time timer (step S137). Further, the number of times of opening (for example, 15) is set in the special winning opening opening number counter (step S138). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the pre-winner opening pre-processing (step S305) (step S139).

  If it is confirmed in step S133 that the big hit flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not a probability change flag indicating that the probability change state is set (step S140). If it is set, the process proceeds to step S147. When the probability variation flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the time reduction flag indicating that the time reduction state is set (step S141). When the time reduction flag is set (that is, when the time change state is not the probability change state but the time reduction state), the value of the time reduction number counter indicating the number of times the special symbol can be changed in the time reduction state is decreased by 1 (step S142). When the value of the time reduction counter after subtraction becomes 0 (step S144), the CPU 56 resets the time reduction flag (step S145). Moreover, control which transmits the low base state designation | designated command to the microcomputer 100 for effect control is performed (step S146).

  In step S147, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set. If the small hit flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S152. When the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a big hit start 3 / small hit start designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S148). In addition, a value corresponding to the small hit display time (for example, the time when the effect display device 9 notifies that the small hit has occurred) is set in the big prize opening control timer (step S149). Further, the number of times of opening (specifically, twice) is set in the number of times of opening counter (step S150). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit start pre-processing (step S308) (step S151).

  In step S152, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300).

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process (step S307) in the special symbol process. In the jackpot end process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the jackpot end display timer is set (step S160). If the jackpot end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step S164. When the big hit end display timer is not set, the big hit flag is reset (step S161), and a control for transmitting a big hit / small hit end designation command is performed (step S162). Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the big hit end display is performed in the effect display device 9 (big hit end display time) is set in the big hit end display timer (step S163), and the processing is ended.

  In step S164, 1 is subtracted from the value of the jackpot end display timer. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step S165). If not, the process ends.

  When the big hit end display time has elapsed, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the type of big hit is a probability variation big hit (15R probability variation big hit, 2R probability variation big hit, fake big hit or sudden hit big hit) (step S166). Whether or not it is a probable big hit is specifically determined based on the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S68 of the special symbol normal process. When it is not a probable big hit (that is, when 15R is a normal big hit), the CPU 56 sets the time reduction flag and shifts the gaming state to the time reduction state (step S171). Further, the CPU 56 sets a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) in a time reduction number counter for counting the number of time reductions (step S172). Then, control goes to a step S173.

  If the probability change big hit, the CPU 56 sets the probability change flag and shifts the gaming state to the probability change state (step S167). Further, the CPU 56 sets a time reduction flag in cases other than the sudden hit (step S168). Then, control goes to a step S173. In this embodiment, the game state is not shifted to the short-time state in the case of a big hit, but the short-time flag may be set in the case of a big hit to shift to the short-time state.

  By executing the processing of steps S166 to S168, in this embodiment, when the big hit game based on the probable big hit is finished, the state is shifted to the probable change state (high probability state) when other than the sudden big hit occurs. At the same time, a transition is made to the short time state (high base state) (that is, transition is made to a high probability / high base state). When a sudden big hit occurs, the state is shifted to a high probability / low base state.

  In this embodiment, the time reduction flag set in the processing of steps S168 and S171 is also used to determine whether or not to increase the number of times the variable winning ball device 15 is opened. The time reduction flag is used to determine whether or not to shorten the variation time of the special symbol.

  In step S173, the CPU 56 sends a gaming state designation command (low base state designation command, high base state designation command, non-probable variation state designation command or certain variation state designation command) according to the current gaming state to the effect control microcomputer 100. Control to send. In the process of step S173, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a high base state designation command when the time reduction flag indicating that the time reduction state is set. When the time reduction flag is not set, control for transmitting a low base state designation command is performed. Further, when the probability variation flag indicating the probability variation state is set, control for transmitting the probability variation state designation command is performed. When the probability variation flag is not set, control for transmitting a non-probability variation state designation command is performed.

  In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a game state designation command every time the big hit game ends. For example, before the game state designation command is transmitted, the game state changes. It may be determined whether or not a game state designation command corresponding to the changed game state may be transmitted only when the game state has changed.

  Thereafter, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S174).

  Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) as effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80. The effect control CPU 101 starts executing the main process when the power is turned on. In the main processing, first, initialization processing is performed for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation control activation interval (for example, 2 ms) (step S701). .

  Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 executes a random number update process for updating the counter value of a counter for generating a predetermined random number (step S702). Then, the timer interrupt flag is monitored (step S703). If the timer interrupt flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S702. When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 101 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 clears the flag (step S704), and executes the effect control process of steps S705 to S706.

  In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first analyzes the received effect control command and performs a process of setting a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S705).

  The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 is received by an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal, and a ring buffer type command reception buffer capable of storing six 2-byte effect control commands. (Formed in RAM). A command reception number counter indicating in which area the received command is stored is used. The command reception number counter takes a value from 0 to 11. In the command analysis processing, the effect control CPU 101 analyzes which command (see FIGS. 15 to 17) is the effect control command stored in the command reception buffer.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs effect control process processing (step S706). In the effect control process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and display control of the effect display device 9 is executed.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the value of the normal symbol variation time timer for measuring the variation time of the normal symbol is 0 (step S707). If the value of the normal symbol variation time timer is not 0, the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the normal symbol variation time timer (step S708).

  36 to 39 are flowcharts showing specific examples of command analysis processing (step S705). The effect control command received from the main board 31 is stored in the reception command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

  In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not a reception command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S611). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 101 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step S612). When read, the value of the read pointer is incremented by +2 (step S613). The reason for +2 is that 2 bytes (1 command) are read at a time.

  If the received effect control command is a customer waiting demonstration designation command (step S615), the effect control CPU 101 displays a demonstration screen on the effect display device 9 (step S616).

  If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step S621), the effect control CPU 101 stores the received variation pattern command in a variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step S622). Then, a variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S623).

  If the received effect control command is a display result designation command (step S625), the effect control CPU 101 forms the received display result designation command (display result 1 designation command to display result 7 designation command) in the RAM. Is stored in the display result designation command storage area (step S626).

  If the received effect control command is a symbol confirmation designation command (step S627), the effect control CPU 101 sets a confirmed command reception flag (step S628).

  If the received effect control command is a big hit start designation command (big hit start 1 designation command, big hit start 2 designation command or big hit start 3 / small hit start designation command) (step S631), the presentation control CPU 101 designates a big hit start designation. A command reception flag (big hit start 1 designation command reception flag, big hit start 2 designation command reception flag or big hit start 3 / small hit start designation command reception flag) is set (step S632).

  If the received effect control command is a special winning opening open designation command (step S635), the production control CPU 101 sets a special winning opening open designation command reception flag (step S636).

  If the received effect control command is a designation command after opening the big prize opening (step S637), the production control CPU 101 sets a designation command reception flag after opening the big prize opening (step S638).

  If the received effect control command is a big hit / small hit end designation command (step S641), the effect control CPU 101 sets a big hit / small hit end designation command reception flag (step S642).

  If the received effect control command is an ordinary symbol variation start designation command (step S643), the effect control CPU 101 stores the received ordinary symbol variation start designation command in the ordinary symbol variation start designation command storage area provided in the RAM. Store (step S644). The effect control CPU 101 sets a normal symbol variation start designation command reception flag (step S645) and sets a normal symbol variation flag indicating that the normal symbol variation is being displayed (step S646).

  In step S645, when receiving the normal symbol variation start designation (hit) command, the effect control CPU 101 sets a normal symbol variation start designation (hit) command reception flag, and issues a normal symbol variation start designation (off) command. When it is received, the normal symbol variation start designation (offset) command reception flag is set.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 sets a value corresponding to 10 seconds to the normal symbol variation time timer for measuring the variation time of the ordinary symbol (step S647).

  In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the low base state, the variation time of the normal symbol is 10 seconds, and when the gaming state is the high base state, the variation time of the normal symbol is 1.5 seconds. However, in step S647, a value corresponding to 10 seconds is uniformly set in the normal symbol variation time timer regardless of the gaming state. Even if the value corresponding to 10 seconds is uniformly set in this way, in this embodiment, since the predetermined effect described later is controlled not to be performed in the high base state, the predetermined effect is executed. Will not cause any trouble. In the high base state, the normal symbol change time timer value is reset by receiving the normal symbol change end designation command when the normal symbol change display ends after 1.5 seconds. (Refer to Step S649 described later). In step S647, it is confirmed whether or not it is in a high base state (specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of game state data described later is 02 (H) or 04 (H)). A value corresponding to 10 seconds may be set in the normal symbol variation time timer only when not in a state, and a value corresponding to 1.5 seconds may be set in the normal symbol variation time timer in a high base state. .

  If the received effect control command is a normal symbol change end designation command (step S648), the effect control CPU 101 resets the normal symbol changing flag and the normal symbol change time timer (step S649). Further, the production control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the normal symbol variation display that has been completed this time is a normal one (step S650A). It is to be noted that whether or not it is a normal symbol is, specifically, whether or not the normal symbol variation start designation command stored in the normal symbol variation start designation command storage area in step S644 indicates a hit (EXT data). Is “01 (H)”: see FIG. 15). In the case of the normal figure, the CPU 101 for effect control confirms whether or not the gaming state is the low base state (step S650B). Whether or not it is in the low base state is, specifically, a value in which the value of the game state data set in step S671 described later indicates a low probability low base state (in this example, “01 (H)”. ) Or a value indicating a high probability low base state (in this example, “03 (H)”). In the low base state, the effect control CPU 101 uses an open notification standby time timer for measuring the standby time from the end of the normal symbol variation display to the display of the long-term release notification image described later. A predetermined value is set (step S650C).

  In this embodiment, as described above, when the base is hit in the low base state, the variable winning ball apparatus is extremely short (0.1 seconds in this example) as the first opening. After 15 is released, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened for a long period of time (5.3 seconds in this example) as the second opening after an interval period of 4.5 seconds. In this embodiment, after the first opening for 0.1 seconds, the player is displayed by displaying a long-term opening notification image indicating that a long-term opening is performed, as will be described later. Notifies that the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened for a long time. For this reason, in this embodiment, in step S680, the effect control CPU 101 uses the release notification waiting time timer as a predetermined value to end the normal symbol variation display and then ends the first release and starts the interval period. A value corresponding to the period up to (in this example, 0.1 second) is set.

  Note that the value set as the predetermined value in the opening notification waiting time timer is not limited to a value corresponding to 0.1 seconds, but is a period after the first opening is completed and until the opening is started for a long time. For example, if the value of the game ball fired by the player after recognizing the display of the long-term release notification image is a value that can be won in 15 minutes enough for the variable prize ball device opened for a long time, for example, 0.2 It may be a value corresponding to seconds or 1.0 seconds.

  If the received effect control command is the first reserved memory number addition designation command or the second reserved memory number addition designation command (step S651), the effect control CPU 101 determines the value of the first reserved memory number counter or the second reserved memory number. The value of the number counter is incremented by 1 (step S652). The effect control CPU 101 also displays the first reserved memory number on the first reserved memory display unit 18c (when the first reserved memory number addition designation command is received) or the second reserved memory display unit 18d on the second reserved memory display unit 18d. The display of the storage number (when the second reserved storage number addition designation command is received) is updated (step S653). Specifically, the display number is increased by one. The first reserved memory number counter and the second reserved memory number counter are formed in the RAM.

  If the received effect control command is the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command or the second reserved memory number subtraction designation command (step S654), the effect control CPU 101 determines the value of the first reserved memory number counter or the second reserved memory number. The value of the number counter is decremented by -1 (step S655). Further, the production control CPU 101 displays the first reserved memory number in the first reserved memory display unit 18c (when the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command is received) or the second reserved memory display unit 18d in the second reserved memory display unit 18d. The display of the storage number (when the second reserved storage number subtraction designation command is received) is updated (step S656). Specifically, the display number is reduced by one.

  If the received effect control command is a general-purpose reserved memory number designation command (step S657), the effect control CPU 101 uses the received general-purpose reserved memory number designation command as the EXT data of the received general-purpose reserved memory number designation command. Then, it is stored in the usual figure reserved storage number storage area provided in the RAM (step S658).

  If the received effect control command is any prize determination result designation command (see FIG. 17) (step S661), the effect control CPU 101 stores the received prize determination result designation command in the prize determination result storage buffer. Save (step S662).

  If the received effect control command is a gaming state designation command (low base state designation command, high base state designation command, non-probability change state designation command or probability change state designation command: see FIG. 16) (step S670), the effect control CPU 101 Sets a value corresponding to the gaming state specified by the received gaming state designation command in the gaming state data area secured in the RAM (step S671). Hereinafter, the value set in the gaming state data area is referred to as gaming state data.

  If the received effect control command is another command, effect control CPU 101 sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step S672). Then, control goes to a step S611.

  FIG. 40 is an explanatory diagram of an example of the game state data value. In the example shown in FIG. 40, the value of the game state data is “01 (H)” in the low probability low base state (non-probability variation non-time-short state). When the low probability high base state (non-probability short state), the value of the game state data is “02 (H)”. When the high probability low base state (probability variation non-short state state), the value of the game state data is “03 (H)”. The value of the gaming state data is “04 (H)” in the high probability high base state (short state at the time of probability change).

  The effect control CPU 101 sets the value of the game state data in accordance with the received game state designation command and the game state at that time in the process of step S671. As an example, when a high base state designation command is received in a low probability low base state (the value of the game state data is “01 (H)”), “02 indicating a low probability high base state” (H) ”is set. When the low base state designation command is received in the high probability high base state (the value of the gaming state data is “04 (H)”), “03 (H) indicating the high probability low base state. "Is set.

  FIG. 41 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a configuration example of an area (winning determination result storage buffer) for storing a winning determination result (specifically, a winning determination result designation command, but may be EXT data thereof). It is. As shown in FIG. 41, in this embodiment, the winning determination result storage buffer that stores the winning determination result at the time of starting winning to the first starting winning opening 13 or the second starting opening 14 is stored in the first hold. A storage area corresponding to the sum of the upper limit value of the storage number (4 in this example) and the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number (4 in this example) (that is, the upper limit value of the total reserved storage number) is secured. . The winning determination result storage buffer is formed in the RAM of the effect control microcomputer 100.

  In step S662, the effect control CPU 101 saves the winning determination result designation command in a storage area corresponding to the value of the total number of pending storages in the winning determination result storage buffer.

  FIG. 42 is an explanatory diagram showing random numbers used by the effect control microcomputer 100. As shown in FIG. 42, in this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 includes random numbers SR1-1 to SR1-3 for determining the first to third final stop symbols, and temporary stop symbol random numbers SR2 for pseudo continuous fluctuation. The predetermined effect determining random number SR3 and the special symbol display result notification determining random number SR4 are used. Note that random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the effect.

  The random numbers SR1-1 to SR1-3 for determining the first to third final stop symbols are “left”, “middle”, “in” in the display area of the effect display device 9 as stop symbols that are variable display results of decorative symbols. This is a random number used to determine a decorative symbol (final stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed in each “right” symbol display area. The final stop symbols are three decorative symbols that are finally stopped and displayed in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas when the variable display of the decorative symbols ends. The combination of the big hit symbols of the decorative symbols is determined by any one of the random numbers SR1-1 to SR1-3 for determining the first to third final stop symbols.

  The quasi-continuous change temporary stop symbol random number SR2 is a random number used to determine a symbol (temporary stop symbol) to be temporarily stopped during the variation of the decorative symbol accompanied by the pseudo-continuous effect.

  The predetermined effect determining random number SR3 is a random number for determining whether or not to execute the predetermined effect.

  The special symbol display result notification determining random number SR4 is a random number for determining whether or not to execute the special symbol display result notification effect and the type of effect when executing.

  FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the effect control process (step S706) in the main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 executes the first predetermined effect process (step S810A) and the opening notification effect process (step S810B), and then performs steps S800 to S807 according to the value of the effect control process flag. Do one of these processes. In each process, the following process is executed. In the effect control process, the display state of the effect display device 9 is controlled to realize variable display of decorative symbols, but control related to variable display of decorative symbols synchronized with the change of the first special symbol is also the second. Control related to variable display of decorative symbols synchronized with the variation of special symbols is also executed in one effect control process. In order to be able to immediately reflect the results of the processes of steps S800 to S807, the first predetermined effect process (step S810A) is performed in the processes of steps S800 to S807 (the processes of steps S800 to S807). May be executed immediately after

  Further, the variable display of the decorative symbol synchronized with the variation of the first special symbol and the variable display of the decorative symbol synchronized with the variation of the second special symbol may be executed by separate effect control process processing. Good.

  Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800): It is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern command has been received from the game control microcomputer 560. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the variation pattern command has been received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the decorative symbol variation start process (step S801).

  Decoration symbol variation start processing (step S801): Control is performed so that the variation of the ornament symbol is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the decorative symbol changing process (step S802).

  Decoration symbol variation processing (step S802): Controls the switching timing of each variation state (variation speed) constituting the variation pattern and monitors the end of the variation time. When the variation time ends, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the decorative symbol variation stop process (step S803).

  Decoration symbol variation stop process (step S803): Based on the reception of the effect control command (design determination designation command) for instructing all symbols to stop, the variation of the ornament symbol is stopped and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. Take control. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804) or the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  Big hit display processing (step S804): After the end of the variation time, control is performed to display a screen (fanfare screen) for notifying the effect display device 9 of the occurrence of a big hit (or occurrence of a small hit). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round processing (step S805).

  In-round processing (step S805): Display control during round is performed. If the round end condition is satisfied, if the final round has not ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the post-round processing (step S806). If the final round has ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end effect process (step S807).

  Post-round processing (step S806): Display control between rounds is performed. When the round start condition is satisfied, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round process (step S805).

  Big hit end effect process (step S807): In the effect display device 9, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit game state (or the small hit game state) has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of an execution section of a predetermined effect. The “predetermined effect” means whether or not a specific effect (reach effect) is executed in the variation display of special symbols or decorative symbols, or a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is likely to enter (pass) a game ball (for example, This is an effect of notifying whether or not the control is performed in the open state. In this embodiment, it may be notified that a predetermined type of hit (for example, a small hit) is made in a predetermined effect. In this embodiment, in a predetermined effect, an effect of a mode in which the roulette is rotated on the display screen of the effect display device 9 is executed. Note that it is not always necessary to notify that the 100% specific effect is executed in the predetermined effect, or to notify that the 100% variable winning ball device 15 is controlled so that the game ball can easily enter. Notification that suggests the possibility of the performance being performed, or notification that suggests that the variable winning ball apparatus 15 may be controlled to a state in which the game ball is likely to enter may be performed. Further, the predetermined effect is executed by the effect control microcomputer 100.

  In the example shown in FIG. 44, the predetermined effect is executed in the order of the sign effect, the start effect, the notification effect, and the result notification effect. The period in which the sign effect is executed is referred to as a first period, and the period in which the start effect, the notification effect, and the result notification effect are executed is referred to as a second period.

  Also, the execution of the first period effect (predictive effect) may be omitted. In addition, the period of the result notification effect may be shortened.

  The sign effect is an effect that reminds the player that the predetermined effect is started. The start effect is an effect for causing the player to recognize that the predetermined effect has started. The notification effect is an effect that causes the player to expect the variable winning ball apparatus 15 to be controlled so that the game ball can easily enter. The result notification effect is an effect that allows the player to recall whether or not the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled so that the game ball can easily enter.

  In addition, it is desirable to provide a case where after the indication effect of the first period is executed, it does not develop into an effect after the start effect of the second period (for example, an effect of roulette). By doing so, not only the expectation that roulette and other effects may be performed, but also the anxiety that it may not necessarily develop into roulette and other effects are performed. It is possible to enhance the effect of the indication effect.

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, when the presence or type of the predetermined effect is determined and triggered by the start of the variable symbol display, the special symbol or the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In some cases, the presence or type of a predetermined effect is determined and the predetermined effect is executed in response to the start of. Hereinafter, in this embodiment, the predetermined effect that is executed by the determination process triggered by the start of the normal symbol variation display is referred to as a “first predetermined effect”, and the start of the special symbol or decorative symbol variation display is started. There is a case where a predetermined effect that is executed when the determination process is performed as an opportunity is referred to as a “second predetermined effect”.

  FIG. 45 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a predetermined effect. FIG. 45 illustrates an effect for notifying that the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is controlled so that the game ball can easily enter.

  As shown in FIG. 45A, the variation of the decorative symbol is started from the state where the variation (variable display) of the left middle right decorative symbol is stopped in the effect display device 9 (see FIG. 45B). ). At that time, display control is performed such that the character image 9a displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 9 moves. The effect by such display control corresponds to the sign effect.

  Next, control for displaying a notification image (for example, an image displaying “roulette chance”) 9b that is an image for an effect as if a predetermined effect is started is executed (see FIG. 45C). . The effect by such display control corresponds to the start effect. Then, the notification effect is started.

  In this embodiment, the notification effect is an effect in which the symbol fluctuates in the effect area 9F (an effect in a form in which the roulette rotates) (see FIG. 45D). After that, in the effect area 9F, an image 9c is displayed that suggests that the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled so that the game ball can easily enter (see FIG. 45E). Next, a notification image 9d is displayed so as to notify that the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled so that the game ball can easily enter (see FIG. 45F). Thereafter, the effect display device 9 displays an image 9e that clearly indicates that the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled so that the game ball can easily enter (open state) (see FIG. 45F). Note that a period during which display control as shown in FIGS. 45E and 45F is performed corresponds to a period of result notification effect.

  The effect control microcomputer 100 is, for example, a state in which the variable winning ball device 15 is likely to enter the game ball based on the reception of the normal symbol variation end designation command after receiving the normal symbol variation start designation (hit) command. The image 9c suggesting that the control is to be controlled is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 45E), and the variable prize is received based on the reception of the normal electric accessory opening end designation command transmitted at the end of the first opening. A notification image 9d is displayed so as to notify that the ball device 15 is controlled so that the game ball can easily enter (see FIG. 45F).

  The effect control microcomputer 100 displays an image 9c that suggests that the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is controlled to be in a state in which a game ball can easily enter after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the normal symbol variation end designation command is received. You may make it display a stop.

  The effect control microcomputer 100 may display the notification image 9d when a predetermined time has elapsed since the image 9c was stopped and displayed. In this case, the notification image 9d is displayed in response to the reception of the normal symbol variation end designation command.

  Further, when the game control microcomputer 560 is configured to transmit a normal electric accessory release start designation command when the variable winning ball apparatus 15 starts to open, the effect control microcomputer 100 opens the first time. The notification image 9d may be displayed at the time of receiving the normal electric accessory release start designation command at the time of receiving the normal electric accessory release start designation command at the time of the second opening.

  Further, the production control microcomputer 100 receives a normal symbol variation start designation (hit) command (command 8E01 (H)) indicating that the display result is a winning symbol, and then a predetermined time (for example, varying time). The image 9c may be displayed when elapses, and the notification image 9d may be displayed when a predetermined time (for example, the time until the first opening of the variable winning ball device 15 ends) elapses. In this case, the notification image 9d is displayed upon reception of the normal symbol variation start designation (hit) command.

  FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of the predetermined effect. FIG. 46 illustrates an effect for informing that a predetermined type of hit (in this example, a small hit) is made.

  As shown in FIG. 46A, the variation of the decorative symbol is started from the state where the variation (variable display) of the left middle right decorative symbol is stopped in the effect display device 9 (see FIG. 46B). ). At that time, a sign effect such that the character image 9a displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 9 moves is executed.

  Next, a start effect that is an effect as if the predetermined effect is started is executed (see FIG. 46C). Then, the notification effect is started.

  The notification effect is an effect such that the symbol fluctuates in the effect area 9F (see FIG. 46D). Thereafter, in the effect area 9F, an image 9f that suggests a predetermined type of hit (in this example, a small hit) is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 46E). Next, a notification image 9g that displays the occurrence of a predetermined type of hit is displayed (see FIG. 46F). Thereafter, the effect display device 9 displays an image 9h clearly indicating that the second grand prize opening (by the movable member 76) is controlled so that the game ball can easily enter (open state) (FIG. 46F). )reference). Note that a period during which display control as shown in FIGS. 46E and 46F is performed corresponds to a period of result notification effect.

  FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram showing still another example of the predetermined effect. FIG. 47 illustrates an effect for notifying that the reach effect (normal reach effect or super reach effect) is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 47A, the variation of the decorative symbol is started from the state where the variation (variable display) of the left middle right decorative symbol is stopped in the effect display device 9 (see FIG. 47B). ). At that time, a sign effect such that the character image 9a displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 9 moves is executed.

  Next, a start effect which is an effect as if a predetermined effect is started is executed (see FIG. 47C). Then, the notification effect is started.

  The notification effect is such an effect that the symbol fluctuates in the effect area 9F (see FIG. 47D). Thereafter, in the effect area 9F, an image (image for notifying that the expectation degree of the big hit is high) 9i that suggests reaching is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 47E). In the example shown in FIG. 47, an image including the character string “extreme heat” is shown as the image 9i that suggests reaching, but in this embodiment, the image that indicates reaching is reached. There are two types of images: an image including a character string of “extreme heat” and an image including a character string of “chance”. In this embodiment, in the case of super reach, the image including the character string of “extreme heat” is stopped and displayed as compared with the image including the character string of “chance” compared to the case of normal reach. The ratio is high.

  Then, the display state of the decorative pattern becomes a reach state (see FIG. 47F). Thereafter, an image 9j that clearly indicates the occurrence of super reach is displayed on the effect display device 9 (see FIG. 47F). Note that a period during which display control as shown in FIGS. 47E and 47F is performed corresponds to a period of result notification effect.

  Note that a privilege may be given to a player instead of displaying an image for notifying that the degree of expectation of jackpot is high. The benefits will be described in detail later.

  Further, in this embodiment, a predetermined effect for notifying that a specific effect (reach effect) is executed and that the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is controlled to be in a state where a game ball is likely to enter (pass) is executed. In such a case, before the notification result is notified, the specific effect (reach effect) is not executed, and the variable winning ball device 15 is not controlled to be in a state in which the game ball is likely to enter (pass) (notification result of miss). There is a case where a predetermined effect (that is, a fake predetermined effect) is notified.

  FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example in a case where a predetermined effect for notifying the result of notification of losing is executed before notifying that a specific effect (reach effect) is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 48A, the variation of the decorative symbol is started from the state where the variation (variable display) of the left middle right decorative symbol is stopped in the effect display device 9 (see FIG. 48B). ). At that time, a sign effect such that the character image 9a displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 9 moves is executed.

  Next, a start effect that is as if a predetermined effect is to be started is executed (see FIG. 48C). Then, the notification effect is started.

  The notification effect is such an effect that the symbol fluctuates in the effect area 9F (see FIG. 48D). Thereafter, in the effect area 9F, the reach effect is not executed, and the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is also stopped and displayed, which indicates that the game ball is not controlled to enter (pass) easily (passage notification result) ( (See FIG. 48E).

  Next, the effect for the notification is again performed in the effect area 9F, and the effect that the effect for the notification is started is executed again (see FIG. 48F). Thereafter, in the effect area 9F, an image (image for notifying that the expectation degree of the big hit is high) 9i that suggests reaching is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 48G). Then, the display state of the decorative pattern becomes a reach state (see FIG. 48H). Thereafter, an image 9j that clearly indicates the occurrence of super reach is displayed on the effect display device 9 (see FIG. 48I).

  49 to 51 are flowcharts showing the first predetermined effect process (step S810A). In the first predetermined effect process, the predetermined effect is started when a predetermined condition is met, triggered by the start of the normal symbol variation display.

  In the first predetermined effect process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not a first predetermined effect executing flag indicating that the first predetermined effect is being executed is set (step S731). If the first predetermined effect executing flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the second predetermined effect executing flag indicating that the second predetermined effect is being executed is set ( Step S732). If the second predetermined effect execution flag is set, the processing is ended as it is. If the second predetermined effect executing flag is not set, any predetermined effect waiting flag (indicating that the execution of the second predetermined effect is pending but the execution start of the second predetermined effect is suspended) It is confirmed whether or not the predetermined production standby flags 1 to 3) are set (step S733). If any one of the predetermined effect standby flags is set, the process is terminated as it is.

  When the first predetermined effect execution flag is set in step S731 (that is, when the first predetermined effect is being executed), the effect control CPU 101 measures the effect period of the first predetermined effect. The value of the first predetermined effect timer for this is -1 (step S734). When the value of the first predetermined effect timer becomes 0 (Y in step S735), the first predetermined effect is ended (step S736). Further, the effect control CPU 101 resets the first predetermined effect executing flag (step S737).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not an open display flag indicating that the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in an open state is set (step S738). When the open display flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to display an open display indicating that the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the open state (step S739). In this case, for example, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to display a character string such as “open” on the display screen of the effect display device 9.

  When it is confirmed in the process of step S735 that the value of the first predetermined effect timer is not 0, the effect control CPU 101 is determined to execute the “predetermined effect (◯)” in the process of step S759. If it is, it is confirmed whether or not an ordinary electric accessory release end designation command has been received (step S740A). In step S740A, the effect control CPU 101 sets the normal electric accessory release end designation command transmitted first after receiving the normal symbol variation end designation command as a confirmation target. That is, the command related to the first opening of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is to be checked (when the normal electric accessory opening end designation command transmitted after the second time is received, the command is not received in step S740A. .) The effect control CPU 101 displays the notification image 9d (see FIG. 45 (F)) on the display screen of the effect display device 9 when receiving the normal electric accessory release end designation command (step S740B).

  When the value of the first predetermined effect timer is not 0, for example, the effect control CPU 101 receives the normal symbol variation end designation command after receiving the normal symbol variation start designation (hit) command. Based on this, the variable winning ball device 15 is also stopped and displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 9 for the image 9c (see FIG. 45E) suggesting that the game ball is controlled so that the game ball can easily enter.

  Since it is informed that the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in the open state when the first ordinary electric accessory opening end designation command is received, the second variable winning ball device 15 is substantially controlled. It is notified that is controlled to the open state. In this embodiment, the second variable winning ball apparatus 15 has a long open period (see FIG. 19A). Therefore, by performing the notification, it is possible to increase the player's expectation that the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in the open state in the low base state.

  In the case where the game control microcomputer 560 is configured to transmit the normal electric accessory release end designation command only at the end of the last release among the plurality of opening of the variable winning ball device 15, the effect Whether or not a predetermined time (for example, the time until the first opening of the variable winning ball device 15 ends) has elapsed after the control CPU 101 received the normal symbol variation end designation command in the process of step S738. If it has been confirmed, the process of step S739 may be executed. Also, whether or not a predetermined time (for example, the time until the first opening of the variable winning ball device 15 ends) has elapsed after the effect control CPU 101 received the normal symbol variation start designation (hit) command. If it has been confirmed, the process of step S739 may be executed. Further, when the game control microcomputer 560 is configured to transmit a “winning game start command” when starting a winning game based on the display result of the normal symbol being a winning symbol, After the control CPU 101 receives the “hit game start command”, it checks whether or not a predetermined time (for example, the time until the first opening of the variable winning ball device 15 ends) has passed. In this case, the process of step S739 may be executed.

  If no predetermined effect stand-by flag has been set in step S733, the effect control CPU 101 executes the next change flag (the first predetermined effect is executed during the change of the special symbol and decorative design to be started next). It is confirmed whether or not a flag indicating that it is determined to be set) is set (step S741). If the next fluctuation flag is set, the process proceeds to step S761.

  When the next variation flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 is operating the non-variable period measurement timer (a timer for measuring a period during which the variation (variable display) of special symbols and decorative symbols is not started). It is confirmed whether it is (not 0) (step S742). If the non-change period measurement timer is not operating, the process proceeds to step S751. Since the change of the special symbol and the change of the decorative symbol are synchronized, the following description will be made taking the change of the special symbol as an example.

  When the non-change period measurement timer is operating, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the special symbol change has started (step S743). Whether or not the variation of the special symbol is started is determined, for example, based on whether or not the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the decorative symbol variation start process or the decorative symbol variation process. When the change of the special symbol is started, the process proceeds to step S771.

  When the change of the special symbol is not started, the CPU 101 for effect control decreases the value of the non-change period measurement timer by −1 (step S744). When the value of the non-change period measurement timer becomes 0, the process proceeds to step S771 (step S745). If the value of the non-change period measurement timer is not 0, the process is terminated.

  In step S751, the effect control CPU 101 receives a normal symbol variation start designation command indicating that a normal symbol variation start designation command (ordinary symbol variation start designation (hit) command or normal symbol variation start designation (disconnection) command) has been received. It is confirmed whether or not the flag (ordinary symbol variation start designation (hit) command reception flag or ordinary symbol variation start designation (out)) command reception flag) is set. If it is not set, the process is terminated.

  When the normal symbol variation start designation command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the gaming state data (see FIG. 40) is a value indicating the high base state (step S752). ). If the value indicates a high base state, the process is terminated.

  If the value does not indicate the high base state, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the big hit gaming state (including the small hit gaming state) is present (step S753). Whether or not the game state is a big hit gaming state is confirmed, for example, by the value of the effect control process flag. In this case, it is assumed that the effect control CPU 101 is in the big hit gaming state when the value of the effect control process flag is 4 or more. If it is a big hit gaming state, the process is terminated.

  When it is not the big hit gaming state, the CPU 101 for effect control stores a winning judgment result designation command (winning judgment result 7 designation command: see FIG. 17) corresponding to the small hit in the winning judgment result storage buffer (see FIG. 41). ) Is stored (step S754). If the winning determination result designation command corresponding to the small hit is stored, the process is terminated.

  When the winning determination result designation command corresponding to the small win is not stored, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the special symbol is changing (step S755). Whether or not the special symbol is changing is determined, for example, based on whether or not the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the decorative symbol changing process or the decorative symbol change stopping process. When the special symbol is not changing, the CPU 101 for effect control confirms whether or not one minute or more has passed since the change of the special symbol is finished (step S757).

  For example, the determination process of step S757 is realized by preparing a timer for measuring the time after the change of the special symbol is completed and checking the measurement value of the timer. If one minute or more has passed since the change of the special symbol is finished, the process is finished. When the time since the change of the special symbol is less than 1 minute, the process proceeds to step S759.

  Also, ending the processing when one minute or more has passed since the change of the special symbol has taken into consideration that the player will continue playing for a while after the change of the special symbol has ended. Because. In other words, in this embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol in the low base state is 10 seconds (see FIG. 19), and the upper limit value of the number of gate passing memories (ordinary symbol holding number) is 4, so [4 × This is because it is considered better to execute the process of step S759 until a time slightly longer than [10 seconds] elapses.

  When the special symbol is changing, the CPU 101 for effect control confirms whether or not a predetermined time (11.5 in this example) has elapsed since the start of the change (step S758). If the predetermined time has elapsed, the process is terminated.

  In this embodiment, when the decoration pattern change (variable display) is executed by the change pattern in which the super reach effect is executed, the super reach effect is started after 11.5 seconds from the start of the change.

  If the predetermined time has not elapsed, the CPU 101 for effect control determines the presence and type of the first predetermined effect (step S759). Then, control goes to a step S764. Note that the elapsed time from the start of change is determined, for example, by the value of the change time timer (see FIGS. 55 and 64).

  In step S759, the effect control CPU 101 determines, for example, the presence and type of the first predetermined effect (which notification result is to be used) using the first predetermined effect determination table shown in FIG.

  In the first predetermined effect determination table shown in FIG. 52, when the display result of the normal symbol is changed to the off symbol (corresponding to the case where the normal symbol change start designation (off) command reception flag is set) and the display of the normal symbol In accordance with each of cases where the result is a winning symbol (equivalent to the case where the normal symbol variation start designation (hit) command reception flag is set), a determination value corresponding to not executing the predetermined effect, and the predetermined effect The determination value corresponding to executing (×), the determination value corresponding to executing the predetermined effect (◯), and the determination corresponding to executing the predetermined effect (○) after the predetermined effect (×) Value is set. The predetermined effect (×) is a predetermined effect for notifying that the reach effect is not executed and the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is not controlled so that the game ball easily enters (passes) (notification result of the loss). The predetermined effect (◯) is a predetermined effect for notifying that the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is controlled so that the game ball easily enters (passes). In the first predetermined effect determination table, at least a determination value corresponding to executing the predetermined effect may be set. FIG. 52 shows the number of determination values, not the determination value itself.

  It should be noted that other modes may be used instead of the “notification content” mode shown in FIG. 52 or in addition to the “notification content” mode shown in FIG. For example, a patrol (emergency red light) -like image that is generally used for notifying the probability change, a character image used in a step-up notice effect for notifying the display result of a special symbol, or a jackpot notice An image or the like may be used as another aspect. In the case of using them, an effect in which a certain effect is linked with a certain effect is realized, such as a probability change confirmation notification, a step-up notification effect, a jackpot notification, and the like.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 52, even if it is a case of a normal figure, the predetermined effect is not executed at a low rate of 10%. The predetermined effect may be executed at a rate of 100%.

  The effect control CPU 101 extracts a predetermined effect determining random number (see FIG. 42) in the process of step S759, and when the predetermined effect determining random number matches one of the determination values corresponding to executing the predetermined effect. Then, it is decided to execute a predetermined effect. When the normal symbol variation start designation (out of) command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 uses the determination value relating to “ordinary symbol outage” in the first predetermined effect determination table, and the normal symbol variation When the start designation (hit) command reception flag is set, the determination value relating to “per normal symbol” in the first predetermined effect determination table is used. In addition, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol variation start designation command storage area (refer to step S644), the normal symbol variation start designation command is stored. The determination value related to “regular symbol” may be used, and the determination value related to “regular symbol deviation” may be used if it is not per common symbol.

  The effect control CPU 101 resets the normal symbol variation start designation command reception flag after executing the processing of step S759. Even if it is determined as Y in step S733, the effect control CPU 101 resets the normal symbol variation start designation command reception flag if the normal symbol variation start designation command reception flag is set. To do. The effect control CPU 101 also sets the normal symbol variation start designation command reception flag that is set even when the process does not proceed to step S759 because it is determined as Y in steps S752, S753, S754, S757, and S758. Shall be reset.

  In step S <b> 761, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the special symbol change has started. Whether or not the change of the special symbol has been started is determined by, for example, the value of the effect control process flag. When the variation of the special symbol has not started, the value of the effect shortening timer (timer for determining the degree of shortening the effect period of the predetermined effect) is incremented by 1 (step S762). When the change of the special symbol is started, the process proceeds to step S771.

  In step S764, the CPU 101 for effect control confirms whether or not it is determined to execute the first predetermined effect. Note that it is determined to execute the first predetermined effect in the process of step S759. If it is not decided to execute the first predetermined effect, the process ends.

  When it is determined to execute the first predetermined effect, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the special symbol is changing (step S765). Whether or not the special symbol is changing is determined, for example, based on whether or not the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the decorative symbol changing process or the decorative symbol change stopping process. If the special symbol is not changing, the process proceeds to step S770. If the special symbol is changing, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the change pattern is not reachable (step S766). If the variation pattern includes a reach effect, the process proceeds to step S771.

  When the variation pattern is an out-of-reach that is not reachable, the effect control CPU 101 normally has the remaining time of variation of the special symbol (for example, specified by the value of the variation time timer shown in FIGS. 55 and 64). It is confirmed whether or not it is shorter than the symbol variation time (for example, 10 seconds: equivalent to a period until the variable winning ball apparatus is controlled so that the game ball can easily enter) (step S767). If not shorter, the process proceeds to step S771. The effect control CPU 101 may confirm whether or not the remaining time of the variation of the special symbol is shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) shorter than the variation time of the normal symbol.

  When the remaining time of the change of the special symbol is short, the production control CPU 101 has a hold memory (at least one of the value of the first hold memory number counter and the value of the second hold memory number counter is not 0). Whether or not (step S768). If there is no pending storage, the process proceeds to step S771.

  If there is an on-hold storage, the effect control CPU 101 sets the next fluctuation flag (step S769).

  In step S770, the effect control CPU 101 sets a value corresponding to a predetermined time (3 seconds in this example) in the non-change period measurement timer.

  In step S771, the CPU 101 for effect control confirms whether or not the next fluctuation flag is set. If the next fluctuation flag is set, a predetermined effect pattern corresponding to the value of the effect shortening timer (see steps S741, S761, S762) is selected (step S772). Specifically, the pattern of the predetermined effect is determined as a pattern in which the period obtained by subtracting the value of the effect shortening timer from the period of the predetermined effect shown in FIG. The shortened period is a period of the result notification effect shown in FIG.

  If the next fluctuation flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the value of the non-change period measurement timer (see steps S742, S743, and S744) is 0 (step S773). . When the value of the non-change period measurement timer is not 0, the effect control CPU 101 selects a predetermined effect pattern according to the value of the non-change period measurement timer (step S774). Specifically, the pattern of the predetermined effect is determined as a pattern in which the period obtained by subtracting the value of the non-change period measurement timer from the period of the predetermined effect shown in FIG. 44 is the effect period. The shortened period is a period of the result notification effect shown in FIG.

  If the value of the non-change period measurement timer is 0 (the non-change period measurement timer has timed out), the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the special symbol is changing (step S775). ). If the special symbol is changing, the CPU 101 for effect control selects a predetermined effect pattern starting from the second period (see FIG. 44) (step S776). When the special symbol is not changing, the CPU 101 for effect control selects a predetermined effect pattern starting from the first period (see FIG. 44) (step S777).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 sets a value corresponding to the time corresponding to the determined predetermined effect pattern in the first predetermined effect timer (step S778). Then, the effect control CPU 101 starts the first predetermined effect (step S779) and sets the first predetermined effect executing flag (step S780).

  Note that when the first predetermined effect execution flag is set, information that can specify the notification result of the first predetermined effect is also set. In this case, for example, a flag indicating that the notification result is “X”, a flag indicating that the notification result is “◯”, and execution of the predetermined effect (◯) after the predetermined effect (×). A flag may be set. For example, when the first predetermined effect execution flag is composed of a plurality of bits (for example, 1 byte), a value that specifies which notification result is a predetermined bit of the first predetermined effect execution flag It may be possible to specify which notification result is set by setting.

  In this embodiment, specifically, the first predetermined effect is realized by executing effect control according to data set in a process table described later (however, the notification image shown in FIG. 45 is displayed). Excluding display control). In that case, the CPU 101 for effect control selects the process table according to the determined pattern of the predetermined effect in the process of step S779, and the effect display device 9 using the data set in the selected process table. Start display control etc. Each process table is stored in the ROM in advance.

  FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the opening notification effect process (step S810B). In the opening notification effect process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not the value of the opening notification waiting time timer is 0 (step S6501). If the value of the opening notification waiting time timer is not 0, the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the opening notification waiting time timer (step S6502), and the value of the opening notification waiting time timer after subtraction becomes 0. It is confirmed whether or not there is (step S6503). If the value of the opening notification waiting time timer after subtraction is 0, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to display a long-term opening notification image on the display screen of the effect display device 9 (step S6504). For example, the effect control CPU 101 includes, as the long-term release notification image, an image including a character string (for example, a character string such as “I will open for a long time”) suggesting that the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is open for a long time. Control to display.

  As described above, the release notification waiting time timer has a period from the end of the normal symbol change display at the timing of receiving the normal symbol change end designation command to the end of the first release and the start of the interval period. Since a value corresponding to the period (0.1 seconds in this example) is set (see step S650C), the process of steps S6501 to S6504 is executed, and after the variable symbol display is ended, the variable is variable. A long-term opening notification image is displayed at the timing when the first opening of 0.1 seconds of the winning ball apparatus 15 is completed.

  In this embodiment, a case is shown in which a long-term opening notification image is always displayed when the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a long time (in this example, 5.3 seconds). It is determined whether or not to display the image for long-term release notification by performing a lottery using, and only when it is determined to display the image for long-term release notification, the process of step S6504 is executed to A notification image may be displayed.

  FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variation pattern command reception waiting process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S811). If the variation pattern command reception flag is set, the variation pattern command reception flag is reset (step S812). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the decorative symbol variation start process (step S801) (step S813).

  FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing a decorative symbol variation start process (step S801) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the decorative symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 reads data stored in the variation pattern command storage area (that is, the received variation pattern command) (step S820). In addition, the data stored in the display result specifying command storage area (that is, the received display result specifying command) is read (step S821).

  Next, the production control CPU 101 determines the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative symbol based on the variation pattern command and the display result designation command (step S823). The determined decorative symbol display result is stored in the decorative symbol display result storage area formed in the RAM (step S824).

  FIG. 56 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a decorative symbol stop symbol. In the example shown in FIG. 56, when the received display result designation command indicates a 15R normal big hit or 15R probability variable big hit (when the received display result designation command is a display result 2 designation command or a display result 6 designation command). ), The effect control CPU 101 determines a combination of decorative symbols having three symbols as stop symbols. However, when the received display result designation command indicates a 15R normal normal jackpot (when the received display result designation command is a display result 2 designation command), the decorative symbols having even-numbered symbols as stop symbols are displayed. Determine the combination. When the received display result designation command indicates a 15R probability variation jackpot (when the received display result designation command is a display result 6 designation command), a combination of decorative symbols with an odd number of symbols is determined as a stop symbol. To do.

  Specifically, when it is decided to make 15R normal big hit or 15R probability variable big hit, SR1-1 is extracted, and the left middle right stop symbol (left middle right symbol is Determine a combination of decorative patterns). When it is decided to win 15R normally, if the decided symbol is an odd symbol, for example, the symbol shifted by one is used as the stop symbol. Further, when it is determined to win 15R probability variation, if the determined symbol is an even symbol, for example, a symbol shifted by one is used as a stop symbol.

  When the received display result designation command indicates a 2R probability variation big hit, sudden appearance big hit, sudden big hit or small hit (the received display result designation command is a display result 3 designation command, a display result 4 designation command, a display result 5 In the case of a designation command or a display result 7 designation command), the effect control CPU 101 determines a combination of “135” which is a chance as a stop symbol.

  In the case of loss, a combination of decorative symbols other than the above is determined (excluding the chances of the following pseudo-ream). However, when a reach effect is involved, a combination of decorative symbols in which two left and right symbols are aligned is determined.

  Specifically, for example, the effect control CPU 101 determines that SR1-1 to SR1-3 are not determined to be out-of-order and are not determined to reach. The left symbol is extracted using SR1-1, the middle symbol is determined using SR1-2, and the right symbol is determined using SR1-3. If the determined left and right symbols match, the right symbol is shifted by one symbol. When it is decided to reach, SR1-1 to SR1-2 are extracted, the left and right symbols are determined using SR1-1, and the middle symbol is determined using SR1-2. If the determined left middle right symbol is a chance, for example, the left symbol is shifted by one symbol.

  FIG. 57 is an explanatory diagram showing a temporary stop symbol in the pseudo-continuous effect. As shown in FIG. 57, in this embodiment, as a temporary stop symbol, a symbol that is not one of the big hit symbols of non-reachable symbols such as “223” and “445”. Combination) is determined.

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 stores the determined stop symbol in the RAM storage area (decorative symbol display result storage area) (step S824). As for the decorative symbol, a stop symbol that recalls a big hit is called a big hit symbol. A stop symbol that recalls a 15R jackpot is called a jackpot symbol. And a stop symbol that reminds of a loss is called a loss symbol.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 deletes the winning determination result designation command stored in the first storage area (storage area 1) of the winning determination result storage buffer (see FIG. 41), and determines the winning determination result. The contents of the storage buffer are shifted (step S825).

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 executes the second predetermined effect process (1) (step S826). The second predetermined effect process (1) in step S826 is a process for determining the presence and type of the second predetermined effect. The specific process of the second predetermined effect process (1) will be described later.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the second predetermined effect execution flag is set (step S827). When the second predetermined effect execution flag is set (that is, when it is determined to execute the second predetermined effect in the second predetermined effect process (1) in step S826), the effect control CPU 101 Selects a predetermined effect pattern starting from the first period (see FIG. 44) (step S828), and selects a process table (see FIG. 58) according to the predetermined effect and the variation pattern (step S829). Thereafter, the process of step S833 is executed according to the process table selected in step S829, whereby the second predetermined effect is started.

  If the second predetermined effect execution flag is not set in step S827, the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table (see FIG. 58) according to the variation pattern (step S831). Next, a process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step S832).

  In addition, the CPU 101 for effect control, according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1), effects device (effect display device 9 as an effect component, effect component as an effect component) Control of the various lamps and the speaker 27) as a production component is executed (step S833). For example, a command is output to the VDP 109 in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the effect display device 9. In addition, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 35 in order to perform on / off control of various lamps. In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 70 in order to output sound from the speaker 27.

  Then, a value corresponding to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command is set in the variation time timer (step S834). Further, a predetermined time is set in the fluctuation control timer (step S835).

  Note that the predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the presentation control CPU 101 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, and image data in which the VDP 109 is written to the VRAM. Is output to the effect display device 9, and the effect display device 9 displays an image corresponding to the signal, whereby the variation of the decorative design is realized.

  Further, when writing the image data in a predetermined area of the VRAM, the effect control CPU 101 actually performs control to write the image data into the VRAM by, for example, a V blank interrupt process based on the V blank interrupt. Therefore, the effect control CPU 101 temporarily stores data to be written to the VRAM in a predetermined area of the RAM, and performs control to write the data in the predetermined area of the RAM to the VRAM by the V blank interrupt process. The V blank interrupt is an interrupt generated by the VDP 109 in the same cycle as the cycle of the vertical synchronization signal supplied to the effect display device 9. For example, when the screen change frequency (frame frequency) of the effect display device 9 is 30 Hz, the generation period of the V blank interruption is 33.3 ms, and when the frame frequency is 60 Hz, the occurrence of the V blank interruption is generated. The period is 16.7 ms. In this example, data is written to the VRAM by the V blank interrupt processing, but data may be written to the VRAM in other processing. Other processes are, for example, a timer interrupt based on a timer built in for production control, or a decorative symbol changing process. In addition, when the process which writes data in VRAM in other processes is performed, it is preferable to perform the process for synchronizing with an execution period and the period of V blank interruption regularly, for example.

  Thereafter, the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the decorative symbol changing process (step S802) (step S836).

  FIG. 58 is an explanatory diagram of a configuration example of the process table. The process table is a table in which process data referred to when the effect control CPU 101 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 101 controls effect devices (effect components) such as the effect display device 9 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table includes data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer set values and presentation control execution data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data) are collected. The display control execution data includes data indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the decorative symbols. Specifically, data relating to the change of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is described. The process timer set value is set with a change time in the form of the change. The effect control CPU 101 refers to the process table and performs control to display the decorative pattern in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value.

  The process table shown in FIG. 58 is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80. The process table is prepared according to each variation pattern and production type. In addition, a process table is also provided for executing effects related to jackpot notification and effects during the jackpot game.

  In this embodiment, the image data related to the variation of the decorative design is not set in the process table. The variation of the decorative pattern itself is directly controlled by the effect control CPU 101 without using the process table.

  In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 performs control so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed by the change pattern corresponding to the change pattern command on a one-to-one basis. The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to.

  59 and 60 are flowcharts showing the second predetermined effect process (1) (step S826). In the second predetermined effect process (1), the predetermined effect is started when a predetermined condition is satisfied, triggered by the start of variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols.

In the second predetermined effect process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not a first predetermined effect executing flag indicating that the first predetermined effect is being executed is set (step S5001). If the first predetermined effect executing flag is set (that is, if the first predetermined effect is being executed), the process proceeds to step S5022. If the first predetermined effect execution flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the next variation flag is set (step S5002). If the next fluctuation flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the non-change period measurement timer is operating (not 0) (step S5003). If the next variation flag is set or the non-change period measurement timer is not 0, the execution of the first predetermined effect is determined but the execution of the first predetermined effect is suspended. Therefore, the process is finished as it is.

  When the non-change period measurement timer is not in operation, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the game state data (see FIG. 40) has a value indicating the high base state (step S5004). If the value indicates a high base state, the process is terminated.

  Note that the second predetermined effect process (1) shown in FIG. 59 and FIG. 60 is a process that is executed at the start of the variation of the decorative symbols. Therefore, in this embodiment, the game is in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. There is no case where the second predetermined effect is determined and the second predetermined effect is executed.

  When the value is not a value indicating the high base state, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the variation display to start this time includes normal reach or super reach (excluding those including pseudo-ream). Confirmation is made (step S5006). Whether or not it includes normal reach or super reach can be specifically determined by confirming the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern command extracted in step S820.

  When normal reach or super reach is included, the CPU 101 for effect control confirms whether or not the normal symbol changing flag is set (step S5007). If the normal symbol variation flag is not set (that is, if the normal symbol variation display is not in progress), the effect control CPU 101 determines a second predetermined effect determination table for determining the presence and type of the second predetermined effect. Then, a predetermined effect determination table (see FIG. 61) for restriction (with restriction) is selected (step S5008).

  If the normal symbol changing flag is set, the CPU 101 for effect control determines the predetermined effect for normal use (no restriction) as the second predetermined effect determination table for determining the presence and type of the second predetermined effect. A table (see FIG. 61) is selected (step S5011).

  In step S5006, when neither normal reach nor super reach is included (including the case where a pseudo-ream is executed together with normal reach or super reach), the effect control CPU 101 determines the presence and type of the second predetermined effect. As the second predetermined effect determination table for this purpose, a normal predetermined effect determination table corresponding to the variation pattern and the display result is selected (step S5012).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines the presence and type of the second predetermined effect using the second predetermined effect determination table selected in steps S5008, S5011, and S5012 (step S5013).

  In step S5013, for example, the effect control CPU 101 determines the presence / absence and type of the second predetermined effect (which notification result is to be used) using the second predetermined effect determination table shown in FIG. 61 or 62. Among these, FIG. 61 shows a second predetermined effect determination table selected in steps S5008 and S5011 when only normal reach or super reach is executed. FIG. 62 shows the second predetermined effect determination table selected in step S5012 when neither normal reach nor super reach is executed or when normal reach or super reach is executed together with the pseudo-ream.

  In the second predetermined effect determination table shown in FIG. 61, a determination value corresponding to not executing the predetermined effect and a predetermined effect (×) are determined depending on whether normal reach or super reach is executed. After the determination value corresponding to executing, the determination value corresponding to executing the predetermined effect (chance), the determination value corresponding to executing the predetermined effect (extreme heat), and the predetermined effect (×) A determination value corresponding to the execution of the predetermined effect (extreme heat) is set. The predetermined effect (chance) and the predetermined effect (extreme heat) are predetermined effects that notify that a specific effect (a reach effect such as a normal reach effect or a super reach effect) is executed. Note that at least a determination value corresponding to the execution of the predetermined effect may be set in the second predetermined effect determination table. FIG. 61 shows the number of determination values, not the determination value itself.

  As shown in FIG. 61, for example, when the normal (unrestricted) predetermined effect determination table is selected in step S5011, the super reach becomes a higher rate than the normal reach. While the second predetermined effect is executed, the ratio of executing the predetermined effect (hot heat) is higher than the predetermined effect (chance). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the predetermined effect (extreme heat) is executed, the expectation for the specific effect (reach effect) to be executed as compared with the case where the predetermined effect (chance) is executed. As the feeling increases, so does the expectation that super-reaching will be performed.

  As shown in FIG. 61, for example, when a predetermined effect determination table for restriction is selected in step S5008, the ratio of execution of the predetermined effect (x) is reduced and the expectation that the specific effect is executed is performed. The rate at which a predetermined performance (chance) with a low degree is executed is reduced.

  In step S5012, the second predetermined effect determination table shown in FIG. 62 is selected. In FIG. 62, when it is determined that the display result of the special symbol is the small hit symbol, the decorative symbol is displayed. If the variation pattern is a normal reach variation pattern with pseudo-continuous effects, the decorative pattern variation pattern is a super-reach variation pattern with pseudo-continuous effects, and other cases, the judgment value is set accordingly. Has been.

  Instead of the “notification content” mode shown in FIGS. 61 and 62, or in addition to the “notification content” mode shown in FIGS. 61 and 62, other modes may be used. For example, a patrol (emergency red light) -like image that is generally used for notifying the probability change, a character image used in a step-up notice effect for notifying the display result of a special symbol, or a jackpot notice An image or the like may be used as another aspect. In the case of using them, an effect in which a certain effect is linked with a certain effect is realized, such as a probability change confirmation notification, a step-up notification effect, a jackpot notification, and the like.

  The effect control CPU 101 extracts a predetermined effect determining random number (see FIG. 42) in the process of step S5013, and the predetermined effect determining random number matches one of the determination values corresponding to executing the predetermined effect. Then, it is decided to execute a predetermined effect. When the second predetermined effect determination table shown in FIG. 62 is selected, the effect control CPU 101 determines that the display result of the special symbol is a small hit symbol, and the decorative symbol variation pattern is Whether the predetermined effect is executed according to the normal reach variation pattern with pseudo-continuous production, the decorative pattern variation pattern with a super-reach variation pattern with pseudo-continuous production, and other cases. Decide whether or not.

  The effect control CPU 101 determines whether the display result of the special symbol is to be a small hit symbol, whether the variation pattern of the decorative symbol is a variation pattern of normal reach with a pseudo-continuous effect, or variation of the decorative symbol For example, it is specified by a display result designation command and a variation pattern command whether the pattern is a super-reach variation pattern with pseudo-continuous effects or other cases.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines to execute the second predetermined effect (Y in step S5014). It is confirmed whether or not the normal symbol changing flag is set (step S5015). If the normal symbol changing flag is not set, the CPU 101 for effect control suspends the start of the second predetermined effect because the execution of the second predetermined effect is decided but the normal symbol is not being changed. The predetermined production standby flag 1 shown is set (step S5016).

  If the normal symbol changing flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the value of the normal symbol changing time timer is less than the predetermined time (step S5017). In this embodiment, it is determined in step S5017 whether or not the predetermined time is less than the execution period of the predetermined effect (that is, the normal effect is immediately displayed although the normal symbol is currently being displayed in a variable manner). And whether or not the normal symbol variation display ends before the end of the predetermined effect. If the value of the normal symbol variation time timer is less than the predetermined time, the CPU 101 for effect control has the normal figure reserved memory number stored in the general figure reserved memory number storage area (see step S658) being zero. It is confirmed whether or not there is (step S5018). If the number of stored customary drawings is not 0, the effect control CPU 101 determines that the execution of the second predetermined effect has been executed, but the normal symbol variation display ends before the end of the second predetermined effect. A predetermined effect standby flag 2 indicating that the start of the second predetermined effect is suspended is set (step S5019).

  If the value of the normal symbol variation time timer is not less than the predetermined time in step S5017, or if the number of the common figure hold memory is 0 in step S5018, the effect control CPU 101 displays the second predetermined effect executing flag. Is set (step S5020), and a value corresponding to the effect period of the predetermined effect is set in the second predetermined effect timer for measuring the effect period of the second predetermined effect (step S5021).

  Note that when the second predetermined effect execution flag is set, information that can specify the notification result of the second predetermined effect is also set. In this case, for example, a flag indicating that the notification result is “x”, a flag indicating that the notification result is “chance”, a flag indicating that the notification result is “hot”, a predetermined effect (× ) May be followed by a flag indicating that a predetermined effect (intense heat) is to be executed. In addition, for example, when the second predetermined effect execution flag is composed of a plurality of bits (for example, 1 byte), a value that specifies which notification result is a predetermined bit of the second predetermined effect execution flag It may be possible to specify which notification result is set by setting. This also applies to the case where the second predetermined effect execution flag is set in step S5107 or step S5118 described later.

  When the first predetermined effect executing flag is set in step S5001 (that is, when the normal symbol variation display is executed and the first predetermined effect is being executed), the effect control CPU 101 It is confirmed whether or not the change display of the normal symbol is the normal symbol (step S5022). Specifically, whether or not it is a normal symbol can be determined by confirming the normal symbol variation start designation command stored in the normal symbol variation start designation command storage area (see step S644).

  In the case of hitting an ordinary map, the production control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the decorative symbol variation display to start this time includes normal reach or super reach (excluding those including pseudo-ream). (Step S5023). Whether or not it includes normal reach or super reach can be specifically determined by confirming the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern command extracted in step S820.

  When normal reach or super reach is included, the CPU 101 for effect control confirms whether or not the display result of the special symbol is a jackpot symbol (step S5024). Whether or not the display result of the special symbol is a jackpot symbol can be specifically determined by confirming the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area (see step S626).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 selects an effect replacement determination table according to the type of reach (whether it is normal reach or super reach) and the display result of the special symbol (step S5025). Then, the effect control CPU 101 uses the selected effect replacement determination table to perform a lottery process using a random number for determining whether or not to replace the notification result, and replace the notification result of the predetermined effect. It is determined whether or not to perform (step S5026).

  FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of the effect replacement determination table. As shown in FIG. 63, in the effect replacement table, there is no replacement of a predetermined effect, a replacement for a predetermined effect (chance), and a predetermined effect (intense heat) in association with the display results of reach types and special symbols. ) Is assigned a replacement value. In FIG. 63, not the determination value itself but the number of determination values is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 63, in this embodiment, when the display result of the special symbol is a big hit symbol (including the big hit symbol of the sudden probability variation big hit), the display result of the special symbol is other than the big hit symbol (displacement). It is decided to replace the predetermined effect at a higher rate than in the case of the symbol or small hit symbol). In addition, when the display result of the special symbol is a big hit symbol (including the big hit symbol with sudden probability change big hit), the display result of the special symbol is other than the big hit symbol (outlier symbol or small hit symbol) Compared to the notification result “chance”, the rate of replacement with the notification result “extreme heat” is higher. Further, in this embodiment, when the super reach is reached, it is decided to replace the predetermined effect at a higher rate than when the normal reach is reached. In addition, in the case of becoming super reach, the ratio of being replaced with the notification result “high heat” is higher than the notification result “chance” as compared to the case of becoming normal reach. Even in the case of a small hit, it may be determined whether or not to replace a predetermined effect using a determination value for a big hit. On the contrary, in the case of suddenly probable big hit, it may be determined whether or not to replace the predetermined effect using the determination value for loss.

  Then, when it is determined to replace the predetermined effect (step S5027), the effect control CPU 101 executes a process of replacing the determined notification result (“chance” or “extreme heat”) (step S5028). ). Specifically, for example, the effect control CPU 101 indicates that it has decided to execute replacement of a predetermined effect (that it is determined to replace the notification result with “chance” or “extreme heat”. Flag) is set, and when the start timing of the result notification effect during the predetermined effect is reached, the process table is switched to the result notification effect process table for notifying the notification result “chance” or “extreme heat”. You can do it.

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets an open display flag (step S5029). After this, the notification result of “chance” or “extreme heat” replaced in the first predetermined effect is notified, but as described above, when the first predetermined effect is ended, the open display is displayed. An open display is displayed based on the flag being set (see steps S738 and S739). Therefore, even if the notification result of the first predetermined effect is replaced, the player can recognize that the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in the open state.

  In addition, the case where the notification result is replaced with “chance” or “extreme heat” when the predetermined effect (○) is being executed per ordinary figure is shown, but the predetermined effect (×) is executed because it is out of the ordinary figure. The notification result may be replaced even when the notification is being made. Also, in this case, for example, when the predetermined effect (×) is being executed because of a deviation from the normal figure, the notification result is displayed at a higher rate than when the predetermined effect (O) is being executed per normal figure. It may be replaced with “chance” or “hot”.

  FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the decorative symbol variation process (step S802) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the decorative symbol changing process, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the second predetermined effect executing flag is set (step S840). If it is set during execution of the second predetermined effect, the effect control CPU 101 decrements the value of the second predetermined effect timer by -1 (step S841). Then, when the value of the second predetermined effect timer becomes 0 (Y in step S842), the second predetermined effect is ended (step S843). Further, the effect control CPU 101 resets the second predetermined effect executing flag (step S844).

  Next, the production control CPU 101 decrements the values of the process timer, the variation time timer, and the variation control timer by 1 (steps S845, S846, S847).

  In addition, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S848). If the process timer has timed out, the process data is switched (step S849). That is, the process timer is started again by setting the process timer setting value set next in the process table in the process timer (step S850). Further, in accordance with the contents (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound number data) set next, the production device (production display device 9 as production component, various lamps and production components as production component) Control of the speaker 27) is executed (step S851).

  If the variation control timer has timed out (step S853), the effect control CPU 101 displays the next display screen for the left middle right decorative symbol (30 ms after the previous decorative symbol display switching time). Image data of the power screen is created and written in a predetermined area of the VRAM (step S854). In this way, the effect control device 9 implements decorative pattern variation control. The VDP 109 outputs a signal based on data obtained by superimposing image data of a predetermined area and image data based on display control execution data set in the process table to the effect display device 9. As such, the effect control device 9 displays the background image, the character image, and the decorative design in the decorative design variation. Further, a predetermined value (for example, a value corresponding to 30 ms) is reset in the fluctuation control timer (step S855).

  In addition, the effect control CPU 101 executes a second predetermined effect process (2) (step S856). In the second predetermined effect process (2) in step S856, the second predetermined effect whose start has been suspended is started while the special symbol or the decorative symbol is being displayed, or the notification result is displayed during the execution of the second predetermined effect. It is a process to replace. The specific process of the second predetermined effect process (2) will be described later.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the variable time timer has timed out (step S857). When the variation time timer has timed out, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the decorative symbol variation stop process (step S803) (step S859). Even if the variable time timer has not timed out, if the confirmation command reception flag indicating that the symbol confirmation designation command has been received is set (step S858), the effect control CPU 101 executes the process of step S863.

  FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the second predetermined effect process (2) (step S856). In the second predetermined effect process (2), the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not the predetermined effect standby flag 1 is set (step S5101). If the predetermined effect standby flag 1 is set, it is confirmed whether or not the normal symbol changing flag is set (step S5102). If the normal symbol changing flag is set, the process proceeds to step S5104. If the normal symbol changing flag is not set, the production control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol or decorative symbol change display is 3 seconds (step S5103). . Whether or not 3 seconds have elapsed since the start of fluctuation can be specifically determined by checking the value of the fluctuation time timer. Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which it is confirmed whether or not the elapsed time is 3 seconds in step S5103, but it is not limited to 3 seconds, for example, whether or not 2 seconds have passed can be It may be configured to check whether 5 seconds have passed. If 3 seconds have elapsed after the start of fluctuation, the process proceeds to step S5104.

  In step S5104, the effect control CPU 101 switches the process table to be used to a process table for a predetermined effect. Then, the production control CPU 101 restarts the process timer set in the process table (step S5105). Further, the effect control CPU 101 resets the predetermined effect standby flag 1 (step S5106). Further, the effect control CPU 101 sets the second predetermined effect executing flag (step S5107) and sets a value corresponding to the effect period of the predetermined effect in the second predetermined effect timer (step S5108).

  If the execution of the second predetermined effect is determined by the processing in steps S5101 to S5108 and the normal symbol variation display is not in progress, the second predetermined effect is waited for the normal symbol variation display to start. Is started. However, if the change display of the normal symbol is not started even after 3 seconds from the start of the change display of the special symbol or the decorative design, the second predetermined value is not waited for the start of the change display of the normal symbol. Production begins.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the predetermined effect standby flag 2 is set (step S5109). If the predetermined effect standby flag 2 is set, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the normal symbol changing flag is set (step S5110). If the normal symbol changing flag is not set, the CPU 101 for effect control resets the predetermined effect standby flag 2 (step S5111) and sets the predetermined effect standby flag 3 (step S5112). In other words, the effect control CPU 101 ends the change display of the normal symbol (that is, the change display in which the remaining time is less than the effect period of the predetermined effect) that has been executed at the start of the change of the special symbol or the decorative symbol. After confirming, the predetermined effect standby flag 2 is reset and switched to the predetermined effect standby flag 3.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the predetermined effect standby flag 3 is set (step S5113). If the predetermined effect standby flag 3 is set, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the normal symbol changing flag is set (step S5114). If the normal symbol changing flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 switches the process table to be used to the process table for the predetermined effect (step S5115). Further, the production control CPU 101 restarts the process timer set in the process table (step S5116). Further, the effect control CPU 101 resets the predetermined effect standby flag 3 (step S5117). Further, the effect control CPU 101 sets the second predetermined effect executing flag (step S5118) and sets a value corresponding to the effect period of the predetermined effect in the second predetermined effect timer (step S5119).

  If the execution of the second predetermined effect is determined by the processing of steps S5109 to S5119, if the remaining time of the normal symbol variation display being executed is less than the predetermined effect rendering period, the next normal symbol variation The second predetermined effect is started after waiting for the display to start.

  FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing a decoration symbol variation stop process (step S803) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the decorative symbol variation stop process, the effect control CPU 101 resets the confirmed command reception flag if the confirmed command reception flag is set (step S8300). Further, in accordance with the data (data indicating the stop symbol) stored in the decorative symbol display result storage area, the effect display device 9 performs control for deriving and displaying the stop symbol (step S8301).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not it is decided to make a big hit (step S8302). Whether or not it is decided to win is confirmed by, for example, a display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area. In this embodiment, it can also be confirmed whether or not it is decided to make a big hit based on the decided stop symbol. If it is not determined to be a big hit, the process proceeds to step S8311.

  If it is decided to win, the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table corresponding to the effect (fanfare effect) informing the start of the big win (step S8304).

  Then, the production control CPU 101 starts a process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step S8305). Further, according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1), an effect device (the effect display device 9 as an effect component, various lamps as an effect component, and an effect component) Control of the speaker 27) is executed (step S8306).

  Thereafter, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804) (step S8307).

  In step S8311, the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 43, the effect control CPU 101 sequentially executes a jackpot display process, a mid-round process, a post-round process, and a jackpot end effect process (these processes are referred to as a jackpot game effect). The following processing may be performed in the big hit game effect.

  In other words, if a sudden big hit or small hit is suddenly performed, a big hit game effect is performed, and a probabilistic latent big hit effect (an effect that is unknown whether the game state is in a probable state) is executed, and then a probable latent effect mode ( A rush effect is executed in a mode in which an effect for making it impossible to determine whether or not the gaming state is a probabilistic state. In case of 2R probable big hit, after performing the 2R probable big hit effect (which may be the same effect as the probable latent hit big hit effect), the rush mode (game state is probable) A rushing effect is executed in a mode in which an effect for making it possible to determine that there is an event. If it is a surprise hit and a big hit, it will be a big hit game effect, and after performing the probable latency big hit effect, it will execute the rush effect to the rush mode, but it will notify that it is in a probable state without entering the rush mode Perform the production.

  As described above, in this embodiment, whether or not a specific effect (for example, a normal reach effect or a super reach effect) is executed in the decorative symbol display, or the variable winning ball device 15 passes the game ball. A predetermined effect (for example, an effect such that the roulette turns) is executed to notify whether or not the state is controlled to be easy to perform (for example, an open state). When the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is performing an effect (in this embodiment, the predetermined effect (O)) that informs that the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is controlled so that the game ball can easily pass as the predetermined effect. When the decorative symbol variation display is executed, the predetermined effect being executed is notified to the effect that the specific effect is executed in the decorative symbol variation display (in this embodiment, the predetermined effect is displayed). (Chance), predetermined production (extreme heat)). When the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is performing an effect of notifying that the game ball is controlled so that the game ball can easily pass as a predetermined effect, and the decorative symbol variation display in which the specific effect is executed is started. Makes it possible to replace the predetermined effect being executed with an effect informing that the specific effect is executed, and to improve the interest in the predetermined effect.

  Further, in this embodiment, an opening notice effect (in this example, a long-term opening notification image is displayed) for notifying that the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be opened is executed. Then, the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in an open state after a time during which a game ball launched after the opening notice effect is executed can be won in the variable winning ball device 15. Therefore, the period from the execution of the opening notice effect to the time when the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is controlled to the open state is too short, and the game ball to the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is recognized after the player recognizes the opening notice effect. It is possible to prevent a situation in which profits cannot be obtained in time even if aiming for a prize.

  Further, in this embodiment, it is notified that the variable winning ball apparatus is controlled to be in an open state for a long period of time (in this example, it is opened for 5.3 seconds when it hits the normal position in the low base state). An opening pattern notification (in this example, a long-term opening notification image is displayed) is executed. And, in the case where the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened for a long period of time and in the case where it is not, the first opening mode is a common opening mode (in this example, the first opening mode is the opening for 0.1 seconds. The variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in the open state, and after the control of the variable winning ball device 15 to the open state in the first opening mode is completed, the opening pattern notification is executed. Therefore, it is possible to maintain a sense of expectation that the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is controlled to be opened for a long period of time until the control of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 according to the first opening mode to the opened state is completed.

  FIG. 67 is an explanatory diagram showing the opening timing of the variable winning ball device 15. As shown in FIG. 67 (A), when the game state is the low base state and hits the normal figure, when the normal symbol variation display is finished, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened for 0.1 second as the first release, After the closing period of 4.5 seconds has elapsed, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened for a long period of 5.3 seconds. In addition, as shown in FIG. 67 (B), when the game state is low base and the game is out of the normal state, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is released only once for 0.1 second when the normal symbol variation display is finished. The

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 67 (A), when the gaming state is a low base state and per game, the long-term opening notification image is displayed after the first opening for 0.1 seconds is finished and is variable. It is notified that the winning ball apparatus 15 will be opened for a long time. Then, as shown in FIG. 67 (A), a sufficiently long period (4.5 seconds in this example) is provided as an interval period until the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened for a long period of time. The player who recognizes that the notification image is displayed and recognizes that the variable winning ball device 15 will be opened for a long period of time, fires the game ball, and then the released gaming ball reaches the variable winning ball device 15. A sufficient period of time is secured. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 19, a period of 9.8 seconds including an interval period of 4.5 seconds and a long open period (5.3 seconds) is Since the fired game ball is sufficiently longer than the period X until the variable winning ball device 15 reaches the variable winning ball device 15, the game ball reaches at least before the opening of the variable winning ball device 15 for a long period of time is completed. A sufficient period of time is provided. Therefore, the period from the display of the long-term opening notification image to the time when the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the open state is too short, and the variable winning ball after the player recognizes the display of the long-term opening notification image. It is possible to prevent a situation in which a profit cannot be obtained in time even if the game ball is won in the device 15.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 67, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is the low base state, regardless of whether the game is in the normal state or out of the normal state (that is, long-term release is performed). Regardless of whether or not the first release mode is used, the first release mode is common to the release for 0.1 seconds, and the long-term release notification image is displayed after the release for 0.1 seconds. Therefore, it is possible to maintain a sense of expectation that the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is controlled to be opened for a long period of time until the control of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 according to the first opening mode to the opened state is completed. That is, in this embodiment, since the first release mode is common, at the stage where the first release for 0.1 seconds is performed (and if the first predetermined performance is not performed), then 5. It is not possible to recognize whether a long-term opening of 3 seconds is performed. Therefore, by displaying the image for long-term opening notification after the first opening is over, it is impossible to recognize whether or not long-term opening will be performed until the first opening is over. Sustained and improved interest in games.

  In this embodiment, a case where a long-term open notification image including a character string such as “I will open for a long time” is displayed as a notice mode that the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a long time. However, it is not limited to the mode shown in this embodiment. For example, the effect display device 9 may perform an effect that counts down the time until the variable winning ball device 15 is opened. Further, for example, it may be notified that the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened by blinking a frame LED or the like with a predetermined lighting / flashing pattern or outputting a predetermined sound effect from the speaker 27. Further, for example, when the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened after the variable winning ball apparatus 15 has been announced to be opened for a long period of time, for example, a character string such as “Opening for a long period of time” is displayed. An image may be displayed to notify that the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is being opened for a long time.

  Further, in this embodiment, the case where the opening of the variable winning ball device 15 for 0.1 seconds is executed only once in the case of a deviation from the usual case is shown. For example, the opening for 0.1 second may be performed a plurality of times.

  In this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 uses the first specific effect (in this embodiment, the normal reach effect as an example) as the specific effect, and the variation of the decorative pattern as compared with the first specific effect. During the display, it is possible to execute a second specific effect (in this embodiment, a super reach effect as an example) that suggests that the display result is likely to be a big hit symbol. And when the variation display of the decorative pattern in which the second specific effect is executed is started, the predetermined effect is generated at a higher rate than in the case where the variation display of the decorative pattern in which the first specific effect is executed is started. Perform replacement of. When the change display of the decorative design in which the second specific effect having a high expectation is executed is started, the predetermined effect is replaced at a high rate, so that the interest for the predetermined effect can be improved.

  Note that, in this embodiment, when the second specific effect is executed, a case is shown in which the ratio of the replacement of the predetermined effect is increased compared to when the first specific effect is executed. When the second specific effect is executed, the predetermined effect may be replaced at a rate of 100%.

  Further, in this embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 100 displays the specific effect when the specific effect is executed and when the variable display of the decorative symbol whose display result is a big hit symbol is started. As compared with the case where the variable display of the decorative symbol whose result is not a big hit symbol is started, the replacement of the predetermined effect is executed at a higher rate. When the variation display of the decorative symbol that the display result becomes the big hit symbol is started, the replacement of the predetermined effect is executed at a high rate, so that the interest for the predetermined effect can be improved.

  In this embodiment, the case where the ratio of execution of the replacement of the predetermined effect is increased when the big hit is made, compared with the case where the big hit is not made. You may comprise so that a predetermined effect may be replaced | exchanged in a ratio.

  In this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 provides a first special effect (in this embodiment, “open”, informing that the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is controlled so that the game ball can easily pass. Open display that displays a character string such as “medium”. And when replacement of a predetermined effect is performed, a 1st special effect is performed. Therefore, even if the replacement of the predetermined effect is executed, it is possible to notify that the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled so that the game ball can easily pass.

  Further, in this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 provides an effect of informing a notification result indicating whether or not the specific effect is executed as the predetermined effect when the normal symbol variation display is not executed. Is executed, the execution of the predetermined effect is started based on the timing at which the normal symbol variation display is started. When the normal symbol fluctuation display is not executed, the execution of the predetermined effect is started based on the timing when the normal symbol fluctuation display is started, so the predetermined effect is executed at a timing that can appropriately increase the player's expectation. It is possible to improve the interest for the predetermined performance.

  For example, if the predetermined effect is executed when the variation display of the normal symbol is not performed, at least the variation display result of the ordinary symbol is hit and the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is not opened. Therefore, although the expectation for executing the specific effect can be increased, the expectation for the variable winning ball apparatus 15 being controlled so that the game ball can easily pass cannot be increased. Therefore, in this embodiment, the execution of the predetermined effect is started based on the timing at which the normal symbol variation display is started, so that the predetermined effect can be executed at a timing at which the player's expectation can be appropriately enhanced. , I am trying to improve the interest for a given performance.

  Also, in this embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 100 provides an effect of informing a notification result indicating whether or not the specific effect is executed as the predetermined effect when the normal symbol variation display is executed. If the remaining fluctuation time of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol being executed is less than the presentation period of the predetermined effect, the predetermined effect is executed based on the timing at which the normal symbol fluctuation display is started next. Start. If the remaining variation time of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol being executed is less than the predetermined effect period, the execution of the predetermined effect is started based on the timing at which the normal symbol variation display is started next. It is possible to execute the predetermined effect at a timing at which the sense of expectation can be appropriately increased, and to improve the interest in the predetermined effect.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the normal control variation display is not being performed, the production control microcomputer 100 starts a special design or decorative design variation display for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). In the case where it is determined whether or not the normal symbol variation display is started, and when it is determined that the normal symbol variation display is started during the predetermined period, the normal symbol variation display is started based on the timing at which the normal symbol variation display is started. When the execution of the predetermined effect is started and it is not determined that the normal symbol variation display is started during the predetermined period, the execution of the predetermined effect is started based on the timing at which the predetermined period has elapsed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect from being stopped when the normal symbol variation display is not started.

  Further, in this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100, when the remaining fluctuation time of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol being executed is less than the production period of the predetermined production and there is a general figure hold memory number, Next, the execution of the predetermined effect is started based on the timing at which the normal symbol variation display is started, and the remaining variation time of the normal symbol variation display being executed is less than the predetermined effect rendering period, and the normal symbol hold memory is stored. When there is no number, the execution of the predetermined effect is started immediately without waiting for the start of the normal symbol variation display. Therefore, if there is no ordinary figure storage number and the start of execution of the predetermined effect cannot be expected even if the start of execution of the predetermined effect is delayed, the start of execution of the predetermined effect is not delayed. A period can be secured.

  Further, in this embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 100 displays the decorative symbol as a predetermined effect when the normal symbol variation display is not executed, as compared to when the normal symbol variation display is executed. In the variable display, the specific effect is not executed, and the variable winning ball apparatus 15 notifies the effect that the game ball is not easily passed through (the predetermined effect (x) in this embodiment) is a low ratio. Run with. When the normal symbol variation display is not executed, a notification that the specific effect is not performed in the decorative symbol variation display and the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is not controlled to easily pass the game ball is given as a predetermined presentation. Even if the predetermined effect is executed in a situation where the variable winning ball apparatus 15 cannot be expected to be controlled so that the game ball easily passes, It is possible to prevent a sense of expectation for the predetermined performance from being lowered.

  Further, in this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 produces an effect of notifying the first specific notification result that suggests the possibility of the specific effect being executed in the decorative symbol variation display as the predetermined effect (this implementation). In the form, a predetermined effect (chance)) and an effect (notification of a second specific notification result suggesting that the specific effect is more likely to be executed in the decorative symbol variation display than the first specific notification result) In this embodiment, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect (intense heat). Then, when the normal symbol variation display is not executed, an effect of informing the second specific notification result is executed at a higher rate as the predetermined effect than when the normal symbol variation display is executed. When the variation display of the normal symbol is not executed, the effect of informing the second specific notification result with high expectation as a predetermined effect is executed at a high rate, and the effect of notifying the first specific notification result with low expectation Even if the predetermined effect is executed in a situation where it is not possible to increase the expectation that the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is controlled so that the game ball can easily pass through by reducing the execution ratio of It is possible to prevent the expectation for the performance from being lowered.

  In this embodiment, when the normal symbol variation display is not executed, the execution ratio of the predetermined effect (hot heat) is increased compared to the predetermined effect (chance). The execution of the (chance) may be prohibited, and only a predetermined effect (severe heat) may be executed.

  In this embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 100 gives an effect of notifying that the specific effect is executed as the predetermined effect or that the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is controlled so that the game ball easily passes. In the case of execution, before the fact that the specific effect is executed in the predetermined effect or the fact that the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is controlled to be in a state in which the game ball is likely to pass through is notified, In this embodiment, the specific effect is not executed in the variation display of the decorative symbols, and the variable winning ball apparatus 15 notifies the fact that the game ball is not controlled to pass easily (in this embodiment, a false predetermined effect) (×)). For example, as shown in FIG. 52, when a predetermined effect (◯) is executed after a predetermined effect (×), or when a predetermined effect (extreme heat) is executed after a predetermined effect (×), as shown in FIG. (See FIG. 48). Therefore, even if the effect that informs that the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is not controlled to be in a state in which the game ball is likely to pass is not executed in the decorative symbol variation display, the predetermined effect is subsequently executed. As a result, the player can have a sense of expectation that the effect that the specific effect is executed or the effect that the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is controlled so that the game ball can be easily passed through may be executed. . Therefore, even when the specific effect is not executed as the predetermined effect and the effect that the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is not controlled to the state where the game ball is likely to pass through is executed, the game for the predetermined effect is executed. Can maintain the expectation of the elderly.

  In this embodiment, as illustrated in FIG. 48, when a false predetermined effect is executed, an indication effect (see FIG. 48B), a start effect (see FIG. 48C), and notification After the production effect (see FIG. 48 (D)), the result notification effect (see FIG. 48 (E)) for notifying the notification result “×” is executed, and then the predictive effect and the start effect are skipped. Although the case where the result notification effect is repeated (see FIGS. 48F to 48H) is shown, the predetermined effect including the sign effect and the start effect may be repeated.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs a specific effect (indicating that the display result of the special symbol becomes a big hit symbol when the special symbol and the decorative symbol are variably displayed. As an example, in addition to executing a super reach effect), in order to notify whether or not a specific effect is executed or whether or not the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled so that a game ball can easily enter. And a predetermined effect for notifying that the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is controlled so that the game ball can easily enter when the special symbol and the decorative symbol are not variably displayed. If it is decided to start, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is shorter than a period until the game ball is controlled so that the game ball can easily enter (for example, a normal symbol at a low base time). 3 seconds shorter than the moving time of 10 seconds: refer to step S770 in FIG. 50, step S745 in FIG. 49 and FIG. A predetermined effect is started based on the time when the variable display of symbols and decorative symbols is started (see steps S743 and S745 in FIG. 49).

  By executing such control, when the decorative pattern variation pattern is a super reach effect, the predetermined effect and the super reach effect are both executed during the variable display of the special symbol and the decorative pattern. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved by increasing the expectation of the display result of the special symbol of the player by the predetermined effect. That is, since the predetermined effect can be executed at the timing when the player is interested in both the display result of the special symbol and the opening of the variable winning ball apparatus 15, the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, if the special symbol variable display is not started within the predetermined period, the effect control microcomputer 100 starts the predetermined effect when the predetermined period has elapsed (step S745 in FIG. 49, and 51 (see steps S775, S776, and S776 shown in FIG. 51), it is possible to prevent the frequency of execution of the predetermined effect for notifying that the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled so that the game ball is likely to enter. it can.

  If the special symbol variable display is not started within the predetermined period, the effect control microcomputer 100 controls the variable winning ball apparatus 15 in a state different from the predetermined effect so that the game ball can easily enter. You may make it perform the 1st special effect for alerting | reporting that it is performed (it is set as modification # 1). In the case of the configuration as modified example # 1, for example, when the microcomputer 100 for effect control determines that the value of the non-change time measurement timer is 0 in the process of step S745 shown in FIG. Instead of proceeding to S771, an image (for example, a character image that directly represents the opening of the variable winning ball device 15) different from the predetermined effect is displayed on the effect display device 9. In the modified example # 1, while the predetermined effect is prevented from being executed in a period in which the player is not interested in the display result of the special symbol, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 enters the game ball by the first special effect. It is possible to notify the player that the state is easily controlled.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs a specific effect (indicating that the display result of the special symbol becomes a big hit symbol when the special symbol and the decorative symbol are variably displayed. As an example, in addition to executing a super reach effect), in order to notify whether or not a specific effect is executed or whether or not the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled so that a game ball can easily enter. And a predetermined effect for notifying that the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is controlled so that the game ball easily enters when the special symbol and the decorative symbol are variably displayed. When it is decided to start, the period until the end of the variable symbol display of the special symbol is shorter than the period until the variable winning ball apparatus is controlled so that the game ball can easily enter, and is maintained. When one or more reserved memories are stored in the storage means, a predetermined effect is started based on the time when the variable symbol special display to be started next is started (steps S765, S766, and S768 in FIG. 50). , S769, step S741 in FIG. 49, step S761 in FIG. 50, and steps S771, S772 in FIG. 51).

  By executing such control, when the variation pattern of the decorative pattern to be executed next is the super reach effect, the predetermined effect and the super reach effect are both displayed during the variable display of the special symbol and the decorative pattern. It will be executed, and the interest of the game can be improved by raising the expectation for the display result of the special symbol of the player by the predetermined effect. That is, since the predetermined effect can be executed at the timing when the player is interested in both the display result of the special symbol and the opening of the variable winning ball apparatus 15, the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 determines that the period until the end of the variable symbol special display is longer than the period until the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is controlled so that the game ball can easily enter. When the hold memory is not stored in the hold storage means, the variable winning display of the special symbol is displayed when the variable winning ball apparatus 15 notifies that the game ball is likely to enter by a predetermined effect. A predetermined effect is started before the end (see steps S765, S767, and S768 in FIG. 50 and steps S775 and S776 in FIG. 51). Therefore, when it is determined that the player is interested in the display result of the special symbol, it is possible to prevent the frequency of execution of the predetermined effect from being lowered by executing the predetermined effect.

  The production control microcomputer 100 has a period until the end of the variable symbol variable display is shorter than the period until the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is controlled so that the game ball can easily enter, and the holding storage means. The first special effect for notifying that the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is controlled to be in a state in which the game ball is likely to enter in a manner different from the predetermined effect when the reserved memory is not stored in the game. (It may be modified example # 2). In the case of the configuration as modified example # 2, for example, the production control microcomputer 100 replaces the processing of step S772 shown in FIG. A character image directly representing that the variable winning ball device 15 is released) is displayed on the effect display device 9. In the modified example # 2, it is prevented that the predetermined effect is executed during a period in which the player is not interested in the display result of the special symbol, and the variable winning ball apparatus 15 enters the game ball by the first special effect. It is possible to notify the player that the state is easily controlled.

  In the above embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes a predetermined effect for notifying whether or not the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled so that the game ball can easily enter, The execution of the predetermined effect is restricted when the variable display of the symbol and the decorative symbol is not performed. As an example, as shown in step S757 in FIG. 49, if the period during which variable display is not performed is equal to or longer than a predetermined time, the predetermined effect is not executed. In such a configuration, it is possible to reliably prevent a situation in which the game lacks fairness upon leaving the player or ending the game. That is, after the player has finished the game, another player may recognize the execution of the predetermined effect and start the game on the gaming machine. When the display result of the normal symbol is a winning symbol, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is controlled so as to be opened, but such control is caused by a game by a player who has finished the game. If another player enjoys an advantageous situation (opening of the variable winning ball device 15) generated based on the game by the player who has finished the game, the game is not fair. However, in the above embodiment, such inconvenience can be avoided.

  In the above embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 prohibits the execution of the predetermined production when the period during which the variable display is not performed is equal to or longer than the predetermined time. It is not limited to prohibiting the execution of the predetermined effect. For example, the execution of only a predetermined effect in one or more predetermined aspects is prohibited (for example, the predetermined effect that makes the notification content hit (O) is not executed, but the notification effect in another aspect is executed) May be possible).

  In the above embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 executes a predetermined demonstration production when the period during which the special symbol is not variably displayed exceeds a predetermined period (step S51A in FIG. 28). , And steps S615 and S616 in FIG. 36). Therefore, the player can easily grasp that the execution of the predetermined effect is prohibited by the demonstration effect.

  Note that the gaming machine is provided with a launching operation unit (operation knob 5) for launching a game ball to the game area 7 by using the rotational force of the drive motor. A firing operation detecting means (for example, means for detecting a tentacle to the operation knob 5 or inputting a signal indicating that the drive motor is in operation) for detecting whether or not the control knob 5 is operating. May prohibit the execution of the predetermined effect when the firing operation detecting means detects that the operation is not performed (referred to as modified example # 3). In the case of the configuration as modified example # 3, for example, in the production control microcomputer 100, instead of the process of step S757 or in addition to the process of step S757, the firing operation detection means inputs a signal. If not, the process is configured to end.

  In the above embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 stores in the hold storage means the hold memory corresponding to the display result of the special symbol as the specific display result (for example, the small hit symbol). When there is, the execution of the predetermined effect for notifying whether or not the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in a state in which the game ball is likely to enter is restricted (see step S754 in FIG. 49). In the above-described embodiment, the small hit symbol is exemplified as the specific display result when the execution of the predetermined effect is restricted. However, the specific display result is displayed as another type of specific display result (for example, the big hit symbol of the fake big hit) ).

  It is unclear whether a specific display result is suggested by a predetermined effect or whether the variable winning ball device 15 is informed that the game ball is controlled to enter easily by executing such control. It is possible to avoid such a situation, and the player can easily understand that the specific display result is suggested. That is, it is avoided that the predetermined effect relating to the special symbol and the predetermined effect for notifying that the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled so that the game ball is likely to enter are simultaneously executed (in particular, the variable winning ball device 15 is When the execution of a predetermined effect for notifying whether or not the game ball is controlled to be in a state in which the game ball is likely to enter is prohibited, the player can be made to pay attention to the special symbol.

  In the above-described embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 prohibits execution of the predetermined production when the hold storage corresponding to the display result as the specific display result is stored in the hold storage unit. However, the restriction on the execution of the predetermined effect is not limited to the prohibition of the execution of the predetermined effect. For example, the execution of only a predetermined effect in one or more predetermined aspects is prohibited (for example, the predetermined effect that makes the notification content hit (O) is not executed, but the notification effect in another aspect is executed) May be possible).

  In addition, the production control microcomputer 100 uses the variable winning ball before the time when the variable symbol special display executed based on the hold storage corresponding to the special symbol display result as the specific display result is started. When it is determined that the predetermined effect for notifying whether or not the device 15 is controlled to be in a state in which the game ball is likely to enter, the execution of the predetermined effect may be prohibited (modified example #). 4). In the case of the modification # 4, for example, the production control microcomputer 100 replaces the process of step S754 with a special symbol changing or not being a big hit game (immediately based on the reserved memory). When the variable display of the symbol can be started), the execution of the predetermined effect is prohibited, and when the special symbol is changing, the execution of the predetermined effect is prohibited when the remaining time of the change is shorter than the execution time of the predetermined effect Configured to do. In that case, it becomes clearer whether the predetermined effect is an effect that suggests a specific display result or whether the variable prize-winning device is an effect that notifies in advance whether or not the game ball is controlled so that it is easy to win a game. As a result, it is possible to clearly grasp that the effect related to the identification information is being executed.

  Further, when execution of the predetermined effect for notifying whether or not the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in a state in which the game ball is likely to enter is restricted, if the restriction is not restricted, the predetermined effect should be executed. If the condition is satisfied (especially when the display result of the normal symbol is a winning symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is replaced by an effect device (for example, a lamp or LED) provided in the gaming machine instead of the predetermined effect. May be informed that the game ball is controlled to be in a state where it can easily enter.

  In the above-described embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 links a predetermined production for notifying whether or not a specific production (for example, a super reach production) is executed to the start of variable symbol special display. Then, it is executed for a predetermined period (for example, the execution period of the predetermined effect) from the start (see steps S826 to S830 in FIG. 55), and the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is controlled so that the game ball can easily enter. In the case where the predetermined effect for informing whether or not the variable is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, the predetermined effect is executed in a shortened period shorter than the predetermined period (see steps S775 and S776 in FIG. 51). Note that starting a predetermined effect in conjunction with the start of variable display of a special symbol means that the predetermined effect starts when the game control microcomputer 560 decides to start variable display of the special symbol. That is, typically, a predetermined effect is started at the start of variable display of a special symbol. However, starting a predetermined effect after the start of variable symbol special display due to a command transmission delay or the like is also included in starting the predetermined effect in conjunction with it.

  When such control is executed, a predetermined effect for notifying whether or not the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in a state in which a game ball can easily enter impedes the effect of variable display of special symbols. It is possible to reduce the degree to which it is performed.

  In the above embodiment, the execution time of the predetermined effect is shortened by not executing the preceding section in the predetermined effect (the period of the sign effect shown in FIG. 44), but the execution time of the predetermined effect is shortened. In other words, the effect control microcomputer 100 may execute the predetermined effect in a manner different from the predetermined effect used when the execution time of the predetermined effect is not shortened.

  In the above embodiment, the execution period of the predetermined effect is always shortened during the change of the special symbol (see steps S775 and S776 in FIG. 51), but the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the change pattern being executed. When the variable display is executed by the variation pattern in which the specific effect (for example, the super reach effect) is executed, the execution period of the predetermined effect may be shortened.

  Further, the specific effect (for example, the super reach effect) is started when a predetermined time (for example, 9 seconds) has elapsed after the variable symbol special display is started. Shortened when a predetermined effect for notifying whether or not the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is controlled to be in a state in which a game ball is likely to enter after the predetermined period has elapsed since the variable display of the symbol is started. You may make it perform a predetermined | prescribed effect in a period (it is set as modification # 5). In the case of the configuration as modified example # 5, for example, the production control microcomputer 100 checks the elapsed time from the start of variable display of the special symbol when executing the process of step S776 (FIG. 55 and FIG. 55). 64.) When the elapsed time exceeds the predetermined time, the predetermined effect pattern starting from the second period (see FIG. 44) is selected. The In the case of such a configuration, a predetermined effect for notifying whether or not the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is controlled so that the game ball can easily enter by simple control is variably displayed as a special symbol. It is possible to reduce the degree of hindering the production effect.

  In addition, when the predetermined effect is executed in the shortened period, the production control microcomputer 100 notifies that the specific effect is not executed in the predetermined effect compared to the case where the predetermined effect is executed over the predetermined period. In addition, the rate at which the variable winning ball device 15 is informed that the game ball is not easily controlled to enter may be lowered (referred to as modified example # 6). In the case of the configuration as modified example # 6, for example, the production control microcomputer 100 changes the “notification content” (see FIG. 52) at a predetermined rate in the process of step S777 shown in FIG. That's fine. The notification contents before and after the change are, for example, “win (◯)” (before change) and “out of place (×)” (after change), “high expectation” (before change), and “low expectation”. By such a change, it is relatively informed that the ratio that notifies that the specific effect when the process of step S774 is executed is not executed and that the variable winning ball device 15 is not controlled to be in a state where the game ball is likely to enter. The ratio becomes smaller. According to such a configuration, the variation of the predetermined effect can be increased, and the predetermined effect for notifying whether or not the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is controlled so that the game ball can easily enter is special. It is possible to reduce the degree of hindering the effect of the variable display of symbols. Furthermore, when a predetermined effect is executed in a shortened period, the predetermined effect that changes the notification content to “displace (×)” (after change) may not be executed. In the case of such a configuration, for example, even if the production control microcomputer 100 is determined to change the notification content to “out (x)” (after change) in the process of step S759 shown in FIG. In the process of step S777 shown in FIG. 51, “notification content” (see FIG. 52) may be changed to “winning (◯)” (before change). In addition, when the production control microcomputer 100 is configured to determine only whether or not to execute the predetermined effect in the process of step S759, and to determine the notification content when starting the predetermined effect, When the predetermined effect is executed in the shortened period, the predetermined effect that causes the notification content to be “disconnected (×)” (after change) may not be selected.

  In the above embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes a predetermined effect for notifying whether or not the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled so that the game ball can easily enter. Execution of a predetermined effect is restricted during variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols performed when an effect (for example, a super reach effect) is executed (see steps S755 and S756 in FIG. 49). With such control, it is possible to prevent the player's attention level from being lowered with respect to the specific effect, and not to reduce the effect of the specific effect.

  In the above embodiment, the execution of the predetermined effect is prohibited during the variable display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol performed when the specific effect is executed (see steps S755 and S756 in FIG. 49). The restriction of the execution of the effect is not limited to the prohibition of the execution of the predetermined effect. For example, the execution of only a predetermined effect in one or more predetermined modes is prohibited (for example, a predetermined effect that makes the notification content hit (O) is not executed, but notification effects in other modes can be executed) Or a predetermined effect that causes the notification content to be off (x) may not be executed, but other types of notification effects may be executed).

  In the above embodiment, the execution of the predetermined effect is restricted even when the specific effect is not executed. However, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines the change pattern being executed in the process of step S758, and specifies the specified effect. When variable display is executed by a variation pattern in which an effect (for example, a super reach effect) is executed, execution of the predetermined effect may be restricted.

  Furthermore, the production control microcomputer 100 may prohibit the execution of the predetermined effect when the time until the specific effect is started is shorter than the execution time of the predetermined effect.

  In the above-described embodiment, the predetermined effect is performed by the effect device (for example, the effect display device 9) in which the specific effect is performed. However, the effect control microcomputer 100 restricts execution of the predetermined effect. When the variable winning ball device is controlled so that the game ball can easily enter, the variable winning device 15 is controlled so that the game ball can easily enter. , A lamp or LED) may notify that the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is controlled so that the game ball can easily enter (referred to as Modification # 7). In the case of the configuration as modified example # 7, for example, the production control microcomputer 100 confirms that 11.5 seconds have elapsed in the process of step S758, and then the variable prize ball device is produced by the production device. 15 notifies that the game ball is controlled so that it can easily enter. In the modified example 7, it is possible not to reduce the effect of the specific effect, and it is possible to notify the player that the variable winning ball apparatus is controlled so that the game ball can easily enter.

  In the above-described embodiment, the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 that forms the big winning opening and the movable member 76 that forms the second big winning opening are provided separately, but either one (for example, , Only the special variable winning ball apparatus 20) may be provided. For example, when only the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is provided, the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is controlled instead of controlling the second large winning opening in the above-described embodiment.

  Hereinafter, modified examples other than the modified examples # 1 to # 7 will be described.

  FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing a decorative symbol variation process in the first modified example (modified example 1). In the first modification, the effect control CPU 101 performs a privilege handling process (step S852) in the decorative symbol changing process.

  FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the privilege handling process of step S846. In the privilege handling process, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not a privilege exists (step S561).

  For example, the special effect is executed based on the fact that it is determined to execute the predetermined effect in the determination process of step S759 (see FIG. 49) when the normal symbol change start designation (departure) command is received. Is given to the player. Specifically, the CPU 101 for effect control sets the privilege flag formed in the RAM in the process of step S759 in such a case.

  In the process of step S561, the effect control CPU 101 determines that there is a privilege when the privilege flag is set. If the CPU 101 for effect control determines that there is a privilege in the process of step S561, it resets the privilege flag. Also, a privilege flag is set. Instead of the privilege flag, a privilege counter (+1 in the process of step S759) may be used.

  When there is a privilege, the CPU 101 for effect control has a variable pattern of variable display (variation) of the currently executed decorative pattern, which is a variable pattern with a pseudo-continuous effect in which the number of temporary stop of the decorative pattern is three times. In that case (step S562), on condition that the player has operated the stick controller 122 (step S563), a process of giving a privilege to the player is performed.

  In the first modification, the process of granting a privilege is performed again after performing an effect such as relieving the player after performing an effect as if a pseudo-continuous effect with the number of re-variations of the decorative symbol being performed twice. An effect that fluctuates the symbol (hereinafter referred to as a relief effect (for example, after a second temporary stop, a predetermined image that recalls relief is displayed on the effect display device 9 and then is changed again).) It is a process to perform.

  When the operation on the stick controller 122 is performed, the effect control CPU 101 changes the process table to be used to the process table corresponding to the relief effect (step S564), and the process data 1 in the process table after the change is changed. A process timer is started (step S565). Further, the rendering device is controlled in accordance with the contents of the process data 1 (step S566).

  In the first modification, the relief effect is executed in order to relieve the disappointment given to the player when the display result of the normal symbol is out of the symbol even though the predetermined effect is executed. In other words, after giving the player the impression that the tentative stop effect of the decorative symbol was executed twice, the number of re-variations increased (in general, the re-variation frequency increased based on the provision of the privilege). The greater the number of changes, the higher the reliability of the jackpot.) The player can be given an impression.

  In Modification 1, an effect for giving an impression as if the number of re-variations of the pseudo-continuous effect has been increased is performed as an effect based on the privilege (privilege effect), but the privilege effect is limited to such an effect. I can't. For example, the privilege effect may be an effect of notifying the degree of expectation of jackpot (possibility of jackpot) during variable display of decorative symbols. Further, the processing after step S562 may be executed at a predetermined rate (for example, 50%) instead of always executing the processing after step S562 when the privilege flag is set.

  Further, the effect display device 9 has a function of displaying a QR code (registered trademark), and the player reads the QR code (registered trademark) by using, for example, a two-dimensional barcode reading function of a mobile phone, and the QR code (registered trademark). In the case where predetermined information is downloaded from a predetermined Web server based on the trademark), a QR code (registered trademark) is displayed as a bonus effect when the privilege granting condition is satisfied. Good.

  In addition, a privilege may be given to a player also when a predetermined effect for notifying whether or not a specific effect (for example, a super reach effect with a pseudo-continuous effect) is executed (FIG. 5). 52).

  Further, in a gaming machine capable of executing a probabilistic latent effect (an effect for making it impossible to determine whether or not the gaming state is a probabilistic state), an effect mode related to the probable latent effect (each effect mode is The degree of discriminating whether or not it is in a state is different)), and the privilege is to shift to a high production mode (a production mode in which it is easy to grasp that the state is probable) In a gaming machine that allows a player to recognize different performance modes depending on the background design of the performance display device 9, the privilege is a high performance mode (a performance that causes the player to recognize that it is in some advantageous state. Mode).

  In addition, an effect produced by a display visually recognized by the player may be an effect that can be selected as an effect based on a predetermined privilege, and an effect based on a sound may be selected as an effect based on a predetermined privilege. For example, a privilege may be given to a player by changing the type of sound that reports the occurrence of a big hit (special sound).

  In the first modification, the stick controller 122 that can be tilted is exemplified as the operation means. However, if the operation means can be operated in a plurality of directions, an operation means other than the stick controller 122 is used. Also good. For example, a switch, button, or controller that can be slid in a plurality of directions can be used as the operation means. Further, for example, a joystick or a cross key having a simpler structure than the stick controller 122 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 70 is an explanatory diagram of an effect control command in the second modified example (modified example 2). In the second modification, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the normal symbol per-determination random number value matches the hit determination value in the gate switch passage process (see FIGS. 18 and 20), and if it matches, the CPU passes the gate. A time determination result 1 designation command is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100. If they do not coincide with each other, a gate passing determination result 2 designation command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100.

  Upon receiving the gate passage determination result designation command (gate passage judgment result 1 designation command or gate passage judgment result 2 designation command), the effect control CPU 101 passes the gate to the gate passage judgment result buffer, which is an area of the RAM. Stores the hour determination result specification command.

  FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing a decorative symbol variation start process in the second modification. In the modified example 2, in the decorative symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101, when one or more gate passage determination result 1 designation commands are stored in the gate passage determination result buffer (step S825A). The process of step S826 is not executed. An effect for notifying that the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in a state in which the game ball is likely to enter by the determination processing in step S825A, with respect to the effect for notifying that the predetermined type is a hit. It can be executed with priority.

  In other words, the production control microcomputer 100 can display the special symbol display result as a specific display result (for example, a small display) when the hold storage corresponding to the normal symbol display result as the winning symbol is stored in the hold storage means. The execution of a predetermined effect for notifying whether or not it becomes a winning symbol) is restricted. When such control is executed, is the notification of the expected degree of the special symbol suggested by the predetermined performance or the variable winning ball apparatus 15 being controlled so that the game ball can easily enter? Can be avoided, and the player can easily understand that a predetermined result based on a normal symbol (a winning symbol) is notified in advance. That is, it is avoided that the predetermined effect relating to the special symbol and the predetermined effect for notifying that the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is controlled so that the game ball is likely to enter are simultaneously executed (particularly, whether a specific display result is obtained). If the execution of the predetermined effect for notifying whether or not is prohibited), it is possible to make the player pay attention to the predetermined effect.

Embodiment 2. FIG.
In the first embodiment, when it is determined that the second predetermined effect is to be executed but the normal symbol variation display is not being performed, the normal symbol variation display is not started even after 3 seconds. Shows the case where the second predetermined effect is started without waiting for the start of the variable symbol display, but it is possible to suggest that it becomes a specific effect (normal reach effect or super reach effect) instead of the second predetermined effect. A cut-in effect may be executed. In the first embodiment, it is determined that the second predetermined effect is to be executed. However, when the remaining time of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol being executed is less than the predetermined effect effect period, Otherwise, the case where the second predetermined effect is started is shown, but a cut-in effect may be executed instead of the second predetermined effect. Hereinafter, a second embodiment in which a cut-in effect is executed instead of the second predetermined effect will be described.

  Note that in this embodiment, detailed description of the parts having the same configuration and processing as those of the first embodiment will be omitted, and parts different from those of the first embodiment will be mainly described.

  FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing a decorative symbol variation start process (step S801) in the second embodiment. Note that the processes in steps S820 to S829 are the same as those in the first embodiment.

  If the second predetermined effect execution flag is not set in step S827, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the cut-in effect execution flag indicating that the cut-in effect is executed is set (step S827). S830A). If the cut-in effect executing flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table corresponding to the cut-in effect and the variation pattern (step S830B). Thereafter, the processes in steps S833 and S851 are executed according to the process table selected in step S830B, so that the cut-in effect is executed during the variation display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol. For example, the effect display device 9 performs an effect in such a manner that a display of a different scene is inserted (cut-in) during the decorative symbol variation display.

  Note that the processes in steps S831 to S836 are the same as those in the first embodiment.

  FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing the second predetermined effect process (1) (step S826) in the second embodiment. Note that the processes in steps S5001 to S5019 are the same as those in the first embodiment.

  In step S5018, in the case where the number of drawings to be reserved is 0, the effect control CPU 101 sets a cut-in effect executing flag (step S5019A).

  Note that the processes in steps S5020 to S5029 are the same as those in the first embodiment.

  FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the second predetermined effect process (2) (step S856) in the second embodiment. Note that the processes in steps S5101 to S5103 are the same as those in the first embodiment.

  If 3 seconds have elapsed after the start of fluctuation in step S5103, the CPU 101 for effect control switches the process table to be used to the process table for cut-in effect (step S5103A). Then, the process timer set in the process table is restarted (step S5103B). Further, the effect control CPU 101 resets the predetermined effect standby flag 1 (step S5103C). After that, the process in step S851 is executed according to the process data set in the process table switched in step S5103A, so that a cut-in effect is executed during the special symbol or decorative symbol variation display.

  Note that the processes in steps S5104 to S5119 are the same as those in the first embodiment.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 notifies whether or not a specific production (for example, a normal reach production or a super reach production) is executed in the decorative symbol variation display. 2 Special effects (for example, cut-in effects) can be executed. Then, when the normal symbol variation display is not being performed, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol variation display is started for a predetermined period after the special symbol or decorative symbol variation display is started. If it is determined that the normal symbol fluctuation display is started, the execution of the predetermined effect is started based on the timing at which the normal symbol fluctuation display is started, and the normal symbol fluctuation display is started during the predetermined period. If not, the second special effect is executed instead of the predetermined effect. When only the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is executed, the variable special ball apparatus 15 is controlled so that the game ball can easily pass by executing the second special effect instead of the predetermined effect. By performing the predetermined effect when the expectation cannot be enhanced, it is possible to prevent the interest for the predetermined effect from decreasing.

  Further, in this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100, when the remaining fluctuation time of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol being executed is less than the production period of the predetermined production and there is a general figure hold memory number, Next, the execution of the predetermined effect is started based on the timing at which the normal symbol variation display is started, and the remaining variation time of the normal symbol variation display being executed is less than the predetermined effect rendering period, and the normal symbol hold memory is stored. If there is no number, the second special effect is executed instead of the predetermined effect. If there is no ordinary figure storage number and normal symbol variation display cannot be expected, by executing the second special effect in place of the predetermined effect, the variable winning ball device 15 can easily pass the game ball. It is possible to prevent the interest for the predetermined effect from being lowered by executing the predetermined effect when the expectation cannot be enhanced with respect to the control.

Embodiment 3 FIG.
In the first embodiment, the case where the execution ratio of the predetermined effect (×) is reduced when the normal symbol is not being displayed is shown, but the execution of the predetermined effect (×) is prohibited. You may comprise as follows. Hereinafter, a third embodiment in which the execution of the predetermined effect (x) is prohibited when the normal symbol variation display is not being performed will be described.

  Note that in this embodiment, detailed description of the parts having the same configuration and processing as those of the first embodiment will be omitted, and parts different from those of the first embodiment will be mainly described.

  FIG. 75 is an explanatory diagram showing a second predetermined effect determination table in the third embodiment. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 75, when a predetermined effect determination table for restriction is selected in step S5008, execution of the predetermined effect (x) is prohibited.

  In this embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 100 does not execute a specific effect (normal reach effect or super reach effect) in the decorative symbol display as a predetermined effect when the normal symbol change display is not executed. And the effect (for example, predetermined effect (x)) which alert | reports that the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is not controlled to the state in which a game ball passes easily is not performed. When the normal symbol variation display is not executed, a notification that the specific effect is not performed in the decorative symbol variation display and the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is not controlled to easily pass the game ball is given as a predetermined presentation. Even if the predetermined effect is executed in a situation in which the variable winning ball apparatus 15 cannot be expected to increase that the game ball is easily controlled to pass, It can prevent that a feeling of expectation falls.

Embodiment 4 FIG.
In the first embodiment, the case where it is determined whether or not to execute the second predetermined effect at the start of the variation of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is shown. However, the specific effect (normal reach effect or super reach effect) in advance at the start winning prize is shown. It may be configured to pre-read whether or not the second predetermined effect is to be executed in advance at the time of start winning. Hereinafter, a description will be given of a fourth embodiment in which whether or not a specific effect is to be executed is pre-read and the presence or absence of the second predetermined effect is determined.

  Note that in this embodiment, detailed description of the parts having the same configuration and processing as those of the first embodiment will be omitted, and parts different from those of the first embodiment will be mainly described.

  In the first embodiment, in the winning determination process in steps S216A and S216B, a winning determination result designation command is transmitted by pre-reading whether or not a big win or not or whether or not a big hit is determined. However, in this embodiment, in the winning determination process, the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) prefetches the variation pattern type, and the variation category command indicating the prefetch result of the variation pattern type. Is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100.

  FIGS. 76 and 77 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the contents of the variable category command in the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 76 and FIG. 77, in this embodiment, which gaming state is displayed, which display result is a special symbol or decorative symbol display result, and a random number for determining a variation pattern type at the time of starting winning A value is set in the EXT data according to whether it is determined that any of the determination values falls within the range, and a variation category command is transmitted.

  For example, if it is determined at the start winning that the game state is shifted to the normal state, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 79 in the winning determination process. judge. When the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 79, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 1 command in which “00 (H)” is set in the EXT data. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the non-reach CA2-1 variation pattern type is commonly assigned to the range of determination values 1 to 79 regardless of the total number of pending storage. Therefore, the production control microcomputer 100 can recognize at least that the variation pattern type is non-reach CA2-1 based on the reception of the variation category 1 command. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 80 to 89, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 2 command in which “01 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 90 to 99, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 3 command in which “02 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 100 to 169, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 4 command in which “03 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 170 to 199, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 5 command in which “04 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 200 to 214, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 6 command in which “05 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 215 to 229, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 7 command in which “06 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 230 to 251, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 8 command in which “07 (H)” is set in the EXT data. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 is commonly assigned to the range of the determination values 230 to 251 regardless of the total pending storage number. Therefore, the production control microcomputer 100 can recognize that at least the variation pattern type is super CA2-7 based on the reception of the variation category 8 command.

  In addition, for example, when it is determined that the game state is a short time state at the time of starting winning, and in the winning determination process, the CPU 56 first determines whether the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 219. Determine whether or not. When the value of the random number for variation pattern type determination is 1 to 219 (that is, when the variation pattern type is non-reach CA2-3), the CPU 56 performs variation with “08 (H)” set in the EXT data. Send category 9 command. Next, the CPU 56 sets “09 (H)” to the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 220 to 251 (that is, when the variation pattern type is super CA2-7). Send a variable category 10 command.

  For example, when it is determined that 15R big hit will be made at the time of starting winning, in the winning determination process, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 38. When the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 38 (that is, when the variation pattern type is normal CA3-1), the CPU 56 sets the variation category in which “10 (H)” is set in the EXT data. 21 commands are transmitted. Next, the CPU 56 sets “11 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 39 to 79 (that is, when the variation pattern type is normal CA3-2). A variation category 22 command is transmitted. Next, the CPU 56 sets “12 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 80 to 251 (that is, the variation pattern type of the super CA3-3). A variable category 23 command is transmitted.

  Further, for example, when it is determined at the start winning that the 2R probability variation big hit, the fake big hit, or the sudden probability variation big hit, the CPU 56 first has a random pattern determination random number value of 1 to 100 in the winning decision processing. It is determined whether or not. When the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 100 (that is, when the variation pattern type is special CA4-1), the CPU 56 sets the variation category in which “13 (H)” is set in the EXT data. 24 commands are transmitted. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 101 to 251 (that is, when the variation pattern type is the special CA4-2), the CPU 56 sets the variation category in which “14 (H)” is set in the EXT data. 25 commands are transmitted.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that a small hit is made at the time of starting winning, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 26 command in which “15 (H)” is set in the EXT data.

  FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the effect control process (step S706) in the fourth embodiment. In this embodiment, instead of the second predetermined effect process (1) (see step S826) and the second predetermined effect process (2) (see step S856) in the first embodiment, the second predetermined effect process (1) (see step S856) is performed in advance at the time of starting winning. A second predetermined effect prefetching process for determining the presence and type of the predetermined effect is executed (step S810a).

  FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing the second predetermined effect prefetching process (step S810a) in the fourth embodiment. In the second predetermined effect prefetching process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not a new variation category command has been received (step S5201). When the new variation category command is received, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the first predetermined effect executing flag is set (step S5202). If the first predetermined effect execution flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the second predetermined effect execution flag is set (step S5203). If the second predetermined effect execution flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the second predetermined effect determination flag indicating that the execution of the second predetermined effect is determined is set. (Step S5204).

  If the second predetermined effect determination flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the next variation flag is set (step S5205). If the next fluctuation flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the non-change period measurement timer is operating (not 0) (step S5206).

  If the non-change period measurement timer is not in operation, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the game state data (see FIG. 40) is a value indicating the high base state (step S5207). If the value indicates a high base state, the process is terminated.

  If the value does not indicate the high base state, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the big hit gaming state (including the small hit gaming state) is present (step S5208). Whether or not the game state is a big hit gaming state is confirmed, for example, by the value of the effect control process flag. In this case, it is assumed that the effect control CPU 101 is in the big hit gaming state when the value of the effect control process flag is 4 or more. If it is a big hit gaming state, the process is terminated.

  If it is not the big hit gaming state, the CPU 101 for effect control confirms whether or not the variation pattern type indicated by the newly received variation category command indicates a super reach loss or a super reach big hit determination result (step). S5209). Specifically, it is confirmed whether a variation category 8 command, a variation category 10 command, or a variation category 23 command has been received.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 adds the count value of the first reserved memory number counter and the count value of the second reserved memory number counter to calculate the total reserved memory number (step S5210). Then, the CPU 101 for effect control corresponds to the determination result at the time of winning (super-reaching miss or super-reach big hit) and the total number of reserved storage as the second predetermined effect determining table for determining the presence and type of the second predetermined effect. The predetermined effect determination table is selected (step S5211).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines the presence / absence and type of the second predetermined effect using the second predetermined effect determination table selected in step S5211 (step S5212).

  FIG. 80 is an explanatory diagram showing a second predetermined effect determination table in the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 80, in this embodiment, in the second predetermined effect determination table, a determination value corresponding to not executing the predetermined effect in association with the determination result at the time of winning and the total number of pending storages, and the predetermined effect A determination value corresponding to executing (×), a determination value corresponding to executing a predetermined effect (chance), and a determination value corresponding to executing a predetermined effect (extreme heat) are set. Yes.

  As shown in FIG. 80, in this embodiment, when the super reach is a big hit, the ratio of the predetermined effect (extreme heat) with the highest expectation for the specific effect is higher than when the super reach is lost. In addition, the execution ratio of the predetermined effect (intense heat) increases as the total number of reserved storage increases. In this embodiment, as will be described later, in each variable display before the variable display in which the second predetermined effect is executed, the predetermined effect (x) is executed (that is, the result of notification of the deviation). The number of false predetermined effects is increased because the execution ratio of the predetermined effects (intense heat) is increased as the total number of reserved storage increases. As a result, the expectation for the appearance of a specific effect (for example, a super reach effect) can be increased.

  Next, when it is determined to execute the second predetermined effect (Y in step S5213), the effect control CPU 101 sets a second predetermined effect determination flag (step S5214).

  In addition, when setting a 2nd predetermined production | presentation determination flag, the information which can also specify the alerting | reporting result of a 2nd predetermined production is also set. In this case, for example, a flag indicating that the notification result is “x”, a flag indicating that the notification result is “chance”, and a flag indicating that the notification result is “hot” are set. May be. Also, for example, when the second predetermined effect determination flag is composed of a plurality of bits (for example, 1 byte), a value that specifies which notification result is set in the predetermined bit of the second predetermined effect determination flag. By doing so, it may be possible to specify which notification result is given.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 sets the total pending storage number in the variation counter (step S5215). The variation counter is a counter for counting the number of variation displays executed until the variation display including the second predetermined effect is started. In this embodiment, when the execution of the second predetermined effect is determined during the variation display of the special symbol or the decoration symbol, and the variation counter is set in step S5215, first, At the end of the variable display, the value of the variable counter is decremented by 1 (see step S8309), and as a result, the value of the variable counter is zero until the variable display immediately before the variable display including the second predetermined effect. . In step S5215, if the variation of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is not being displayed, it is desirable that the effect control CPU 101 sets a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the current total number of pending storages in the variation counter. . With this configuration, the variation counter is always set to 0 until the variation display immediately before the variation display including the second predetermined effect.

  FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing a decorative symbol variation start process (step S801) in the fourth embodiment. Note that the processes in steps S820 to S825 are the same as those in the first embodiment.

  In step S826a, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the second predetermined effect determination flag is set. If the second predetermined effect determination flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table corresponding to the predetermined effect (×) and the variation pattern (step S826b). Further, the effect control CPU 56 sets a value corresponding to the effect period of the predetermined effect in the second predetermined effect timer (step S826c). Thereafter, the process of step S833 is executed according to the process table selected in step S826b, whereby the second predetermined effect (X) is started.

  By executing the processing of steps S826a to S826c, in this embodiment, a false predetermined effect (predetermined effect (x)) is executed while the second predetermined effect determination flag is set. Then, as will be described later, when the execution timing of the second predetermined effect that is originally determined as the prefetch target in the second predetermined effect prefetching process is reached, the second predetermined effect determination flag is switched to the second predetermined effect executing flag, The predetermined effect to be read ahead is executed.

  Note that the processes in steps S828 to S829 are the same as those in the first embodiment. When the process table corresponding to the predetermined effect and the variation pattern is selected in step S829, the effect control CPU 101 sets a value corresponding to the effect period of the predetermined effect in the second predetermined effect timer (step S829a).

  Note that the processes in steps S831 to S836 are the same as those in the first embodiment.

  FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing a decorative symbol variation process (step S802) according to the fourth embodiment. In this embodiment, in the decorative symbol changing process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not the second predetermined effect executing flag or the second predetermined effect determination flag is set (step S840a). If either the second predetermined effect execution flag or the second predetermined effect determination flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S841. Note that the processes in steps S841 to S843 are the same as those in the first embodiment. When the second predetermined effect is ended in step S843, the effect control CPU 101 resets the second predetermined effect executing flag if the second predetermined effect executing flag is set (step S844a).

  The processes in steps S845 to S855 are the same as those processes in the first embodiment. Next, in this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 executes a second predetermined effect replacement process in place of the second predetermined effect process (2) in the first embodiment (step S856a).

  Note that the processes in steps S857 to S859 are the same as those in the first embodiment.

  FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the second predetermined effect replacement process (step S856a) in the fourth embodiment. In the second predetermined effect replacement process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not the normal symbol variation start designation command reception flag is set (step S5301). When the normal symbol variation start designation command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the started variation display of the normal symbol is a normal symbol (step S5302). ). Whether or not it is a normal symbol, specifically, it is confirmed whether the normal symbol variation start designation (hit) command reception flag or the normal symbol variation start designation (out of) command reception flag is set. Can be determined. Further, for example, it may be determined whether or not it is a normal symbol by checking the normal symbol variation start designation command stored in the normal symbol variation start designation command storage area (see step S644).

  In the case of hitting the normal map, the CPU 101 for effect control confirms whether or not the second predetermined effect determination flag is set (step S5303). Further, the effect control CPU 101 resets the normal symbol variation start designation command reception flag after executing the processing of step S5303. When the second predetermined effect determination flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 executes a process of replacing the notification result of the false predetermined effect currently being executed with “◯” (step S5304). Specifically, for example, the effect control CPU 101 sets a flag indicating that it has decided to replace the fake predetermined effect, and starts the result notification effect during the fake predetermined effect. It is only necessary to switch to the result notification effect process table for notifying the notification result “◯” at the timing.

  FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing a decorative symbol fluctuation stopping process (step S803) according to the fourth embodiment. Note that the processes in steps S8301 to S8307 are the same as those in the first embodiment.

  If it is not a big hit in step S8303, the CPU for effect control 101 checks whether or not the second predetermined effect determination flag is set (step S8308a). If the second predetermined effect determination flag is set, effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the variation counter (step S8308b). Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the value of the variation counter after subtraction is 0 (step S8308c). If the value of the variation counter is 0, the effect control CPU 101 sets a second predetermined effect executing flag (step S8308d).

  When setting the second predetermined effect execution flag, information that can specify the notification result of the second predetermined effect specified by the second predetermined effect determination flag or the like is also set. In this case, for example, a flag indicating that the notification result is “x”, a flag indicating that the notification result is “chance”, and a flag indicating that the notification result is “hot” are set. May be. In addition, for example, when the second predetermined effect execution flag is composed of a plurality of bits (for example, 1 byte), a value that specifies which notification result is a predetermined bit of the second predetermined effect execution flag It may be possible to specify which notification result is set by setting.

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 resets the second predetermined effect determination flag (step S8308e), and proceeds to step S8311. Note that the processing in step S8311 is the same as the processing in the first embodiment.

  When the processing of steps S8308a to S8308e is executed, the variation display immediately before the variation display including the second predetermined rendering that is the target of prefetching in the second predetermined rendering prefetching process (see step S810a) is ended. The second predetermined effect determination flag is reset and switched to the second predetermined effect execution flag. Then, in the next variable display, the second predetermined effect to be prefetched is executed based on the fact that the second predetermined effect executing flag is set (see steps S827 to S829a).

  As described above, in this embodiment, an effect (for example, a predetermined effect) for notifying that a specific effect (for example, a normal reach effect or a super reach effect) is executed as a predetermined effect in a variable display of decorative symbols by prefetching. (Chance) or a predetermined effect (intense heat)), a variation effect (for example, a fake predetermined effect) is displayed in the variation display of the decorative pattern that is executed before the variation display of the decorative pattern in which the predetermined effect is executed. (×)). Therefore, even if the off-line effect is executed, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that an effect of notifying that the specific effect is executed as the predetermined effect may be executed in the subsequent variation display of decorative symbols. It is possible to maintain the player's expectation for the predetermined performance.

  Further, in this embodiment, when an effect for notifying that the specific effect is executed in the variation display of the decorative design is executed as the predetermined effect, the display result of the variation display of the decorative design in which the specific effect is executed is a big hit. In the case of the symbol, the off-line effect is executed many times compared to the case where the display result of the variation display of the decorative symbol in which the specific effect is executed does not become the jackpot symbol. Therefore, the more outliers are executed, the more the player can have an expectation that an effect of notifying that the specific effect will be executed as the predetermined effect may be executed, thereby increasing the player's expectation. be able to.

  In this embodiment, when the second predetermined effect is executed by pre-reading, the case where the expectation for the specific effect is increased as the off-line effect is executed more frequently is described. Similarly, in the configuration in which the execution of the second predetermined effect is determined at the start of the variation of the special symbol or the decorative symbol, a configuration in which the off-line effect can be performed a plurality of times during the variation display of the single decorative symbol is configured. You may comprise so that the expectation with respect to a specific effect may become so high that the shift | offset | rendering effect is performed during the variation display of a decoration design.

  In addition, for example, even when the first predetermined effect is executed, it is configured so that a plurality of off-stage effects can be executed, and the more the off-stage effects are executed, the more easily the variable winning ball apparatus 15 passes the game ball. You may comprise so that the expectation with respect to being controlled may increase.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the display of the normal symbol on which the display result is hit is started while the offending effect is executed, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 displays the offending effect being executed. It replaces with the effect which alert | reports that it is controlled to the state in which a game ball is easy to pass (In this embodiment, an alerting | reporting result is replaced with "(circle)"). Therefore, the off-stage effect being executed can be replaced with an effect informing that the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled so that the game ball can easily pass through, so that the interest in the predetermined effect can be improved.

  In addition, in this embodiment, although the case where only the structure which performs a 2nd predetermined effect by prefetch was shown, the structure similar to 1st Embodiment was comprised with the structure which performs a 2nd predetermined effect by prefetch. In addition, it may be configured to execute the second predetermined effect by determining the execution of the second predetermined effect at the start of the variable symbol display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol.

  Also, a configuration in which a cut-in effect is executed instead of the second predetermined effect in the second embodiment, and a predetermined effect (x) is executed when the normal symbol variation display in the third embodiment is not being performed. In combination with a plurality of or all of a configuration for prohibiting the above and a configuration for pre-reading whether or not to execute the specific performance in the fourth embodiment and determining the presence or absence of the second predetermined performance. It is also possible to configure the pachinko gaming machine 1 by applying to the configuration of the form.

Embodiment 5 FIG.
In the first to fourth embodiments, the effect control microcomputer 100 notifies the effect that the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in a state (open state) through which the game ball easily passes as a predetermined effect (this In the embodiment, when the display of the decorative design in which the specific effect is executed is started while the predetermined effect (◯) is being executed, the predetermined effect being executed is displayed in the variable display of the decorative design. Is replaced with an effect (in this embodiment, a predetermined effect (chance), a predetermined effect (extreme heat)) for notifying that a specific effect is executed.

  However, the effect control microcomputer 100 notifies the effect that the specific effect is executed in the decorative symbol variation display as the predetermined effect (in this embodiment, the predetermined effect (chance) or the predetermined effect (extreme heat)). When the display of the variation of the normal symbol on which the display result is a win is started, the predetermined effect being executed is notified that the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is controlled to the open state. You may perform control which replaces with an effect (in this embodiment, predetermined effect ((circle))). When controlling in such a manner, when the display of the normal symbol on which the display result is successful is started when the effect that informs that the specific effect is executed as the predetermined effect is executed, It is possible to replace the predetermined effect being executed with an effect informing that the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled so that the game ball can easily pass therethrough, and to improve the interest for the predetermined effect.

  FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing a first predetermined effect process in the fifth embodiment.

  In the fifth embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 does not execute the processes of steps S738 and S739 shown in FIG. Other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment shown in FIG.

  FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the second predetermined effect process (1) in the fifth embodiment.

  In the fifth embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 executes the processes of steps S5009 and S5010 in addition to the processes shown in FIG. In other words, when the normal symbol changing flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the normal symbol change display is based on the normal symbol (step S5009). In addition, it can be determined by the normal symbol variation start designation command stored in the normal symbol variation start designation command storage area (see step S644) whether or not the normal symbol is reached. In the case of hitting an ordinary map, the effect control CPU 101 selects the predetermined effect determination table for restriction 2 (see FIG. 87) as the second predetermined effect determination table for determining the presence and type of the second predetermined effect. (Step S5010). In the case where the usual figure is not reached, the CPU 101 for effect control uses a predetermined effect determination table for normal use (no restriction) as a second predetermined effect determination table for determining the presence and type of the second predetermined effect (FIG. 87). Reference) is selected (step S5011).

  Also, instead of the process of step S5008 shown in FIG. 59, the process of step S5008A is executed. That is, the effect control CPU 101 selects the limited 1 predetermined effect determination table (see FIG. 87) as the second predetermined effect determination table for determining the presence and type of the second predetermined effect (step S5008A).

  Other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment shown in FIG. Accordingly, in the process of step S5012, the second predetermined effect determination table shown in FIG. 62 is selected as in the case of the first embodiment. In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 does not execute the processing shown in FIG.

  FIG. 87 is an explanatory diagram showing a second predetermined effect determination table in the fifth embodiment. In the second predetermined effect determination table shown in FIG. 87, the determination value corresponding to not executing the predetermined effect and the predetermined effect (×) are determined depending on whether normal reach or super reach is executed. After the determination value corresponding to executing, the determination value corresponding to executing the predetermined effect (chance), the determination value corresponding to executing the predetermined effect (extreme heat), and the predetermined effect (×) A determination value corresponding to the execution of the predetermined effect (extreme heat) is set. The predetermined effect (chance) and the predetermined effect (extreme heat) are predetermined effects that notify that a specific effect (a reach effect such as a normal reach effect or a super reach effect) is executed. Note that at least a determination value corresponding to the execution of the predetermined effect may be set in the second predetermined effect determination table. In FIG. 87, not the determination value itself but the number of determination values is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 87, for example, when a predetermined effect determination table for normal use (for unlimited use) is selected in step S5011, the super reach becomes a higher rate than the normal reach. While the second predetermined effect is executed, the ratio of executing the predetermined effect (hot heat) is higher than the predetermined effect (chance). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the predetermined effect (extreme heat) is executed, the expectation for the specific effect (reach effect) to be executed as compared with the case where the predetermined effect (chance) is executed. As the feeling increases, so does the expectation that super-reaching will be performed.

  As shown in FIG. 87, for example, when the predetermined effect determination table for restriction 1 is selected in step S5008A, the rate at which the predetermined effect (x) is executed is reduced, and the expectation level for a specific effect is increased. The rate at which low predetermined effects (chances) are executed is reduced. As shown in FIG. 87, for example, when the predetermined effect determination table for restriction 2 is selected in step S5010, execution of a predetermined effect (chance) with a low expectation level as a specific effect is prohibited. In addition, when the predetermined effect determination table for restriction 2 is selected, the execution ratio of the predetermined effect (chance) or the predetermined effect (extreme heat) is reduced rather than prohibiting the execution of the predetermined effect (chance). May be.

  FIG. 88 and FIG. 89 are flowcharts showing the second predetermined effect process (2) in the fifth embodiment. The processing in steps S5101 to S5119 is the same as the processing in the first embodiment shown in FIG. 65, but in the fifth embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 further performs processing in steps S5120 to S5128. Execute.

  That is, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the normal symbol variation start designation command reception flag is set after the execution of the process of step S5119 (step S5120). When the normal symbol variation start designation command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the display result of the started variation display of the normal symbol is a normal symbol (step S5121). It can be determined whether the normal symbol variation start designation (hit) command reception flag or the normal symbol variation start designation (out of) command reception flag is set, for example. . Further, for example, it may be determined whether or not the normal symbol variation start designation command is stored by confirming the normal symbol variation start designation command stored in the normal symbol variation start designation command storage area (see step S644).

  When hitting the normal map, the CPU 101 for effect control confirms whether or not the second predetermined effect executing flag is set (step S5122). When the second predetermined effect execution flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether the notification result of the second predetermined effect is “chance”, “extreme heat”, or “×”. (Step S5123). The effect control CPU 101 determines whether the notification result is “chance”, “severe heat”, or “×”, a flag set together with the second predetermined effect executing flag, or the second predetermined effect executing. This can be determined by checking the value of a predetermined bit of the flag. The effect control CPU 101 resets the normal symbol variation start designation command reception flag after executing the process of step S5123.

  When the notification result is “chance”, “extreme heat”, or “×”, the CPU 101 for effect control confirms whether or not the display result of the special symbol is a big hit symbol (step S5124). Whether or not the display result of the special symbol is a jackpot symbol can be specifically determined by confirming the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area (see step S626).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 selects an effect replacement determination table corresponding to the notification result of the second predetermined effect and the display result of the special symbol (step S5125). Then, the effect control CPU 101 uses the selected effect replacement determination table to perform a lottery process using a random number for determining whether or not to replace the notification result, and replace the notification result of the predetermined effect. It is determined whether or not to perform (step S5126).

  FIG. 90 is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of the effect replacement determination table. As shown in FIG. 90, in the effect replacement table, determination values are assigned to execute the replacement of the predetermined effect and not to replace the predetermined effect in association with the display result and the notification result of the special symbol. . In FIG. 90, not the determination value itself but the number of determination values is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 90, in this embodiment, when the notification result is “x”, it is determined to replace the notification result “◯” at a rate of 100%. In addition, when the display result of the special symbol is other than the jackpot symbol (out-of-line symbol or small hit symbol), the display result of the special symbol is a big hit symbol (including the big hit symbol of sudden probability change big hit). In comparison, it is decided to replace the notification result “◯” at a high rate. Further, when the notification result is “chance”, it is determined to replace the notification result “◯” at a higher rate than when the notification result is “extreme heat”. Even in the case of a small hit, it may be determined whether or not to replace a predetermined effect using a determination value for a big hit. On the contrary, in the case of suddenly probable big hit, it may be determined whether or not to replace the predetermined effect using the determination value for loss.

  Then, when it is determined to replace the predetermined effect (step S5127), the effect control CPU 101 executes a process of replacing the notification result with “◯” (step S5128). Specifically, for example, the effect control CPU 101 sets a flag indicating that it is determined to replace the predetermined effect, and the start timing of the result notification effect during the predetermined effect is reached. In addition, the process table may be switched to the result notification effect process for notifying the notification result “◯”.

  In the fifth embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 produces an effect (in this example, a predetermined effect (chance) or a predetermined effect (notice that a specific effect is executed in the decorative symbol variation display) as the predetermined effect. When the display of a normal symbol whose display result is a winning symbol is started during execution of intense heat)), the variable winning ball device 15 passes the game ball through the predetermined effect being executed. It replaces with the effect (in this example, predetermined effect ((circle))) which alert | reports that it is controlled to an easy state. When an effect that informs that a specific effect is to be executed as a predetermined effect is being executed, if the variable display of a normal symbol whose display result is a winning symbol is started, the predetermined effect being executed can be changed. Replacing the winning ball device 15 with an effect that informs that the game ball is controlled so that the game ball can easily pass through can improve the interest of the predetermined effect.

  Further, in the fifth embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 performs a predetermined operation when an effect (in this example, a predetermined effect (chance)) for notifying the first specific notification result is being executed as the predetermined effect. As compared with the case where an effect that notifies the second specific notification result as an effect (in this example, a predetermined effect (intense heat)) is executed, the replacement of the predetermined effect is executed at a higher rate. When the effect of notifying the first specific notification result with low expectation is being executed as the predetermined effect, the effect is to notify that the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to a state in which the game ball easily passes at a high rate. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the predetermined performance.

  In the fifth embodiment, when the predetermined effect (chance) is being executed, the ratio of the replacement of the predetermined effect is compared to when the predetermined effect (intense heat) is being executed. Although it is enhanced, the predetermined effect may be replaced at a rate of 100% when the predetermined effect (chance) is being executed.

  Further, in the fifth embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 displays the display result in the jackpot symbol when the predetermined effect is being executed in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol in which the display result does not become the jackpot symbol. Compared to the case where the predetermined effect is executed in the variation display of the special symbol or the decorative pattern, the replacement of the predetermined effect is executed at a higher rate. When the display of a special symbol or decorative symbol that does not result in a big hit is started, the variable winning ball device 15 is replaced with an effect that informs that the game ball is controlled to easily pass through at a high rate. Since it performs, the interest with respect to a predetermined effect can be improved.

  In this embodiment, when the big win is not achieved, the proportion of execution of the predetermined effect is increased compared to when the big win is achieved, but when the big hit is not achieved, the predetermined effect is performed at a rate of 100%. May be replaced.

Embodiment 6 FIG.
In the fifth embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 determines that the second predetermined effect is to be executed, but if the normal symbol variation display is not being performed, the normal symbol variation display will continue even after 3 seconds. If it is not started, the second predetermined effect is started without waiting for the start of the normal symbol variation display, but instead of the second predetermined effect, the specific effect (normal reach effect or super reach effect) is to be made. A suggestive cut-in effect may be executed. Further, in the fifth embodiment, the production control CPU 101 determines to execute the second predetermined production, but when the remaining time of the variable display of the normal symbol being executed is less than the production period of the predetermined production, When there is no usual figure hold storage number, the second predetermined effect is started, but a cut-in effect may be executed instead of the second predetermined effect. Hereinafter, a fifth embodiment in which a cut-in effect is executed instead of the second predetermined effect will be described.

  In the sixth embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 executes a decorative symbol variation start process (decorative symbol variation start process in the second embodiment) as shown in FIG. In other words, when the CPU 101 for effect control confirms that the second predetermined effect executing flag is not set in step S827, the cut-in effect executing flag indicating that the cut-in effect is executed is set. It is confirmed whether or not there is (step S830A).

  FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing the second predetermined effect process (1) (step S826) in the sixth embodiment.

  In the sixth embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 sets a cut-in effect executing flag when it is confirmed in step S5018 that the number of reserved drawings is 0 (step S5019A).

  The other processes of the second predetermined effect process (1) are the same as the processes in the fifth embodiment (see FIG. 86).

  FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing the second predetermined effect process (2) (step S856) in the sixth embodiment.

  In the sixth embodiment, the production control CPU 101 switches the process table to be used to the cut-in production process table when it is confirmed in step S5103 that 3 seconds have elapsed after the start of the fluctuation ( Step S5103A). Then, the process timer set in the process table is restarted (step S5103B). Further, the effect control CPU 101 resets the predetermined effect standby flag 1 (step S5103C). Thereafter, the process (see FIG. 64) such as step S851 is executed in accordance with the process data set in the process table switched in the process of step S5103A, so that the cut-in effect is displayed during the variation display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol. Is executed.

  The other processes of the second predetermined effect process (2) are the same as the processes in the fifth embodiment.

  In the sixth embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 informs whether or not the specific production (in this embodiment, the normal reach production or the super reach production) is executed in the decorative symbol variation display. A special effect (in this embodiment, a cut-in effect) can be executed. Then, when the normal symbol variation display is not being performed, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol variation display is started for a predetermined period after the special symbol or decorative symbol variation display is started. If it is determined that the normal symbol variation display is started, the execution of the predetermined effect is started based on the timing at which the normal symbol variation display is started, and the normal symbol variation display is performed during the predetermined period. If it is not determined to start, the second special effect is executed instead of the predetermined effect. When only the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is executed, the variable special ball apparatus 15 is controlled so that the game ball can easily pass by executing the second special effect instead of the predetermined effect. By performing the predetermined effect when the expectation cannot be enhanced, it is possible to prevent the interest for the predetermined effect from decreasing.

  Further, in this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100, when the remaining fluctuation time of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol being executed is less than the production period of the predetermined production and there is a general figure hold memory number, Next, the execution of the predetermined effect is started based on the timing at which the normal symbol variation display is started, and the remaining variation time of the normal symbol variation display being executed is less than the predetermined effect rendering period, and the normal symbol hold memory is stored. If there is no number, the second special effect is executed instead of the predetermined effect. If there is no ordinary figure storage number and normal symbol variation display cannot be expected, by executing the second special effect in place of the predetermined effect, the variable winning ball device 15 can easily pass the game ball. It is possible to prevent the interest for the predetermined effect from being lowered by executing the predetermined effect when the expectation cannot be enhanced with respect to the control.

Embodiment 7 FIG.
In the fifth embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 is controlled to reduce the execution ratio of the predetermined production (x) when the normal symbol variation display is not being performed. Execution may be prohibited. In addition, when the normal symbol variation that is per unit is being displayed, the execution of the predetermined effect (chance) is prohibited, but the execution of the predetermined effect other than the predetermined effect (◯) is prohibited. It may be. Hereinafter, the execution control microcomputer 100 prohibits the execution of the predetermined effect (×) when the normal symbol variation display is not being performed, and the predetermined effect (◯) when the normal symbol variation display corresponding to the normal symbol is being performed. A seventh embodiment for prohibiting execution of a predetermined effect other than the above will be described.

  FIG. 93 is an explanatory diagram showing a second predetermined effect determination table in the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 93, in this embodiment, when the predetermined effect determination table for restriction 1 is selected in step S5008A (see FIGS. 86 and 91), execution of the predetermined effect (x) is prohibited. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 93, when the predetermined effect determination table for restriction 2 is selected in step S5010 (see FIGS. 86 and 91), execution of a predetermined effect other than the predetermined effect (◯) is executed. Is prohibited.

  In the seventh embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes a specific effect (a normal reach effect or a super reach effect) as a predetermined effect in the decorative symbol change display when the normal symbol change display is not executed. In addition, an effect (in this embodiment, a predetermined effect (x)) that informs that the variable winning ball device 15 is not controlled so that the game ball can easily pass through is not executed. Therefore, even when the predetermined effect is executed in a situation where the expectation for the variable winning ball apparatus 15 being controlled so that the game ball can easily pass is not increased, the expectation for the predetermined effect is reduced. Can be prevented.

  Further, in the seventh embodiment, when the variable symbol display of the normal symbol on which the display result is a win is executed, the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to a state in which the game ball easily passes as a predetermined effect. The execution of effects other than effects (in this embodiment, predetermined effects (◯)) is prohibited. By preventing the variable winning ball device 15 from being notified that the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to easily pass the game ball in a predetermined effect when the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be easy to pass the game ball. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrustful with respect to the predetermined performance.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 93, a predetermined effect determination table for restriction 2 in which only predetermined effects (O) are distributed so as to be executable is used. For example, FIG. In the first predetermined effect determination table, the distribution may be performed so that the predetermined effect (◯) is executed at a rate of 100% when the normal figure is reached. Even in such a configuration, the variable winning ball device 15 is in a state (open state) in which the game winning ball easily passes as a predetermined effect when the variable display of the normal symbol whose display result is the winning symbol is being executed. It is possible to prohibit the execution of effects other than effects (for example, predetermined effects (◯)) that notify that they are controlled. In the case of such a configuration, the processing in steps S5009 and S5010 of the second predetermined effect process (1) and the predetermined effect determination table for restriction 2 shown in FIG. 93 are unnecessary.

Embodiment 8 FIG.
In the fifth embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 sets the notification result to “◯” by lottery when the display of the variation of the normal symbol that becomes the normal figure is started during the execution of the second predetermined production. Although the replacement has been performed, a cut-in effect may be further executed when the notification result is replaced. Hereinafter, an eighth embodiment in which a cut-in effect is performed when a notification result is replaced will be described.

  FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing a decorative symbol variation process (step S802) according to the eighth embodiment.

  In the eighth embodiment, the production control CPU 101 resets the second predetermined production execution flag in the process of step S844, and then has a cut-in production execution flag indicating that execution of the cut-in production has been decided. It is confirmed whether it is set (step S844P). When the cut-in effect execution flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the cut-in effect execution flag and switches the process table to be used to the process table for cut-in effect (step S844Q). Then, the process timer set in the process table is restarted (step S844R). After that, the process in step S851 is executed according to the process data set in the process table switched in the process in step S844Q, so that the cut-in effect is displayed after the second predetermined effect during the special symbol or decorative pattern variation display. Is executed.

  FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing a part of the second predetermined effect process (2) (step S856) in the eighth embodiment.

  In the eighth embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 sets a cut-in effect execution flag (step S5128P) when executing the process of replacing the notification result with “◯” in the process of step S5128.

  Other processing is the same as the processing in the fifth embodiment.

  In the eighth embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 100 notifies whether or not a specific effect (in this example, a normal reach effect or a super reach effect) is executed in the decorative symbol variation display. (In this embodiment, a cut-in effect) can be executed. And when replacement of a predetermined effect is performed, a 2nd special effect is performed. Therefore, even if the replacement of the predetermined effect is executed, it can be notified that the specific effect is executed.

  FIG. 96 is an explanatory diagram showing an ordinary symbol determination table in the third modification (Modification 3). Note that Modification 3 (Modification 3-1 and Modification 3-2) is applicable to each of the above-described embodiments and modifications.

  In the above embodiment, the variable winning ball device 15 is released a plurality of times in the winning gaming state, and in the low base state, the total opening period is shorter than the total opening period in the high base state and the first opening period is the second time. In the high base state, each open period in the hit gaming state is shorter than the longest open period in the low base state, and in the low base state, the total non-open period in the hit gaming state is high base. In the modified example 3, the CPU 56 opens the variable winning ball device 15 a plurality of times in the winning gaming state, but in the high base state, the total opening period is longer than the total non-opening period in the state. It is shorter than the total opening period in the low base state and the first opening period is shorter than the second opening period. Period is shorter than the longest opening period in the high base state, the total non-open period in per game state in the high base state is controlled to be longer than the total non-open period in the low base state.

  As an example, as shown in FIG. 96 (A), in the low base state, when it is determined that the winning is achieved, the variable winning ball device (ordinary electric accessory) 15 is opened five times (the opening time of the first opening is 0.1 seconds, the closing time after the first opening is 0.1 seconds, each opening time of 2-5 times is 1.36 seconds, and the interval time between each opening of 2-5 times is 1.38 seconds ) In addition, as shown in FIG. 96 (B), in the high base state, when it is determined to be a win, the variable winning ball apparatus (ordinary electric accessory) 15 is opened twice (the opening time for the first opening is 0). .1 second, the opening time of the second opening is 5.3 seconds: the closing time (interval time) is 4.5 seconds). Therefore, in the high base state, it is possible to give the player an impression as if it has been opened for a long period of time (because the first opening period is extremely short, the player may not notice the opening). As a result, it is possible to increase the player's expectation that the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is controlled to the open state in the high base state.

  As shown in FIGS. 96 (A) and 96 (B), in the modified example 3-1, the CPU 56 performs the total open period in the hit gaming state in the high base state (0.1 seconds in the example shown in FIG. 96 (A)). +5.3 seconds = 5.4 seconds) is the total open period in the low base state (short-time state) (in the example shown in FIG. 96B, 0.1 seconds + 1.36 seconds × 4 = 5.54 seconds) The first opening period (0.1 second in the example shown in FIG. 96A) is shorter than the second opening period (5.3 seconds in the example shown in FIG. 96A). Control to shorten. Further, the CPU 56 has the longest release period in the high base state (FIG. 96B in the example shown in FIG. 96 (B)) in the hit base game state in the low base state. In the example shown in FIG. 96 (A), control is performed so as to be shorter than 5.3 seconds.

  Further, the CPU 56 determines that the total non-release period in the hit gaming state in the high base state (4.5 seconds in the example shown in FIG. 96A) is the total non-release period in the low base state (FIG. 96B). In the example shown, control is performed so as to be longer than 0.1 seconds + 1.38 seconds × 3 = 4.24 seconds. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game store from being disadvantageous due to excessive winning of the game ball to the variable winning device in the high base state.

  Note that the number of times of opening, the opening period, and the closing period (interval time) shown in FIGS. 96A and 96B are examples, and the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened a plurality of times in the winning game state, and in the high base state. The total opening period is shorter than the total opening period in the low base state and the first opening period is shorter than the second opening period. In the low base state, each opening period in the hit gaming state is in the high base state. If it is shorter than the longest open period and is controlled so that the total non-release period in the hit gaming state is longer than the total non-release period in the low base state in the high base state, FIG. You may use the frequency | count and period different from the frequency | count of opening shown in (B), an open period, and a closing period.

  In the example shown in FIG. 96A, the first release period in the low base state is shorter than the second and subsequent release periods, but the first release period in the low base state is shorter than the second and subsequent release periods. It may be longer. Further, the opening period or the closing period of each time in the low base state may be variously changed on condition that the total opening period in the high base state is shorter than the total opening period in the low base state.

  96 (C) and 96 (D) show Modification 3-2. In the modified example 3-2, when it is determined that the winning is in the low base state, the variable winning ball apparatus (ordinary electric accessory) 15 is opened twice (the opening time of the first opening is 0.1 second, 2 The opening time of the first opening is 5.3 seconds: the closing time (interval time) is 1.4 seconds). Further, in the high base state, when it is determined that the winning is achieved, the variable winning ball apparatus (ordinary electric accessory) 15 is opened five times (the opening time for the first opening is 0.1 seconds, the closing time after the first opening) Is 0.1 second, each open time of 2-5 times is 1.36 seconds, and the interval time between 2-5 open times is 1.38 seconds).

  Also in the modified example 3-2, the effect control CPU 101, in the low base state, adds up the non-open state period between the open states in the winning game state (1.4 in the example shown in FIG. 96C). Seconds) is a high base state, and the total period of the non-open state between a plurality of open states in the gaming state (in the example shown in FIG. 96C, 0.1 seconds + 1.38 seconds × 3 = 4 .24 seconds).

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the game control microcomputer 560 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 100. However, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits another command (for example, FIG. Or a sound / lamp board having a function of a circuit mounted on the sound output board 70 and a function of a circuit mounted on the lamp driver board 35). An effect control command may be transmitted and transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 on the effect control board 80 via another board. In that case, the command may simply pass through another board, or the sound output board 70, the lamp driver board 35, and the sound / lamp board are equipped with control means such as a microcomputer, and the control means receives the command. In response to this, control related to sound control and lamp control is executed, and the received command is changed as it is or, for example, to a simplified command to control the effect display device 9. You may make it transmit to. Even in such a case, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the display control in accordance with the effect control command received directly from the game control microcomputer 560 in each of the above-described embodiments. Display control can be performed in accordance with commands received from the driver board 35 or the sound / lamp board.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, the game machine uses a game medium as an example. However, the game machine according to the present invention is not limited to a game machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media. The present invention can also be applied to an enclosing game machine that encloses a game medium such as a ball and gives a score when a prize granting condition is satisfied.

  In addition, the gaming machine may be configured as follows in relation to the predetermined effect.

(1) When the effect control microcomputer 100 decides to execute the predetermined effect related to the display result of the special symbol when the normal symbol is not changed, the normal control is changed until the change of the normal symbol is started. A gaming machine that restricts execution of production. In the case of such a configuration, a predetermined effect can be executed at a timing at which the player will be interested in both the display result of the special symbol and the opening of the variable winning ball apparatus 15.

(2) In the case where the production control microcomputer 100 executes the predetermined effect when the normal symbol is not changed, compared to the case where the predetermined effect is executed when the normal symbol is changed. Thus, a gaming machine that lowers the ratio of “notification content” to “disappearance (×)”. In such a configuration, even when the predetermined effect is executed in a situation where the player is less likely to be interested in opening the variable winning ball apparatus 15, it is possible to prevent the expectation for the predetermined effect from being lowered. it can.

(3) The variable winning ball device 15 enters the game ball during the fluctuation in which the stop symbol of the normal symbol that the variable control winning ball device 15 controls to open the variable winning ball device 15 is derived and displayed. A gaming machine that restricts execution of a predetermined effect other than the predetermined effect that informs that the control is easily performed. In the case of such a configuration, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is controlled to be in the open state even though the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is not notified that the game ball is controlled so as to enter easily. Occurrence of the situation is prevented, and the possibility that the player feels suspicious can be eliminated.

(4) The production control microcomputer 100 is accompanied by a specific production (for example, a super reach production) during execution of a predetermined production informing that the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled so that the game ball can easily enter. A gaming machine that changes the content of a predetermined effect to a content that suggests a specific effect when variable display of decorative symbols is started. In the case of such a configuration, the predetermined effect related to the special symbol is executed even when the predetermined effect for notifying that the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is controlled so that the game ball can easily enter is being executed. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the predetermined performance.

(5) During the execution of the predetermined effect related to the special symbol, the effect control microcomputer 100 controls the variable winning ball apparatus 15 to be in the open state. A game machine that, when started, changes the content of the predetermined effect to the content of the predetermined effect that notifies the variable winning ball device 15 that the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled so that the game ball can easily enter. In such a configuration, even when the special symbol is changing, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect for notifying that the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled so that the game ball can easily enter. Therefore, the interest of the predetermined production is further improved.

(6) When the microcomputer 100 for effect control determines to execute the predetermined effect for informing that the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is controlled so that the game ball can easily enter or a specific effect that suggests a specific effect. In addition, before executing the determined notification effect, the gaming machine that executes the effect that notifies the variable winning ball apparatus 15 that the game ball is not controlled to enter a state in which the game ball easily enters. In such a case, even after it is informed that the variable winning ball device 15 is not controlled so that the game ball can easily enter, the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled so that the game ball can easily enter. It is possible to maintain the player's expectation for being played or for a specific performance to be executed. Note that the notification that the variable winning ball device 15 is not controlled so that the game ball can easily enter and the predetermined effect may be executed during the variable display of one special symbol, or during the variable display of two times. May be executed on each of these.

(7) The production control microcomputer 100 executes both the predetermined production for notifying that the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled so that the game ball can easily enter and the predetermined production for suggesting the specific production at the same time. To play. In the case of such a configuration, the interest of the game is further improved by executing a plurality of types of predetermined effects at the same time.

(8) The production control microcomputer 100 executes a predetermined notice effect (for example, a step-up notice effect) following the predetermined effect, and the “notification content” of the predetermined effect is produced at the start of the predetermined notice effect ( For example, a gaming machine that is a first step effect in a step-up notice effect). In such a case, even if the execution frequency of the predetermined effect is increased by linking the predetermined effect and the step-up notice effect, etc., the “notification contents” and the actual aspect of the gaming machine match. It is prevented that the situation not to occur frequently occurs.

(9) The effect control microcomputer 100 executes a predetermined effect for notifying that the degree of expectation of the jackpot is high (for example, “notification content” is set to “extreme heat” as illustrated in FIG. 47). In this case, the gaming machine is configured so that a player can easily visually recognize a part or all of the target of the predetermined effect (for example, an area where the notification effect is executed on the display screen is enlarged or a bright display state is set). In such a configuration, when the degree of expectation for the big hit is high, the degree of attention to the predetermined effect can be increased.

(10) A predetermined effect (for example, “notification content” as illustrated in FIG. 45) is provided for the effect control microcomputer 100 to notify that the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled so that the game ball can easily enter. When the “winning (○)” is executed), a notification effect is executed on the display screen of the effect display device 9 (for example, the display screen of the effect display device 9) where the player can easily recognize a part or all of the target of the predetermined effect. A game machine that expands the area or brightens the area. In the case of such a configuration, when the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to a state in which a game ball can easily enter, the degree of attention to a predetermined effect can be increased.

(11) The effect control microcomputer 100 suggests a predetermined effect and a specific effect informing that the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled in a state where the game ball is likely to enter in another area on the display screen of the effect display device 9. A gaming machine that performs a predetermined performance. In the case of such a configuration, it is possible to easily recognize both the predetermined effects.

(12) A game machine in which the effect control microcomputer 100 restricts execution of other effects (for example, a step-up notice effect or a cut-in notice effect) during execution of a predetermined effect. In the case of such a configuration, the player can be focused only on the predetermined effect.

(13) A gaming machine that executes an effect in conjunction with a notice effect in a variable display of decorative symbols, triggered by the same aspect as the start aspect of a predetermined effect. For example, a result notification effect corresponding to the effect in step 1 of the step-up notice effect is executed as the notification result of the predetermined effect, and the step-up notice effect is executed with the effect as step 1. In the case of such a configuration, the execution rate of the predetermined effect can be increased without increasing the ratio of the false predetermined effect.

(14) As a predetermined effect, when an effect (for example, a predetermined effect (extreme heat)) for notifying that the variation display result of a special symbol or a decorative symbol is a big hit symbol is high is executed. A game machine that executes a predetermined effect in an easier-to-recognize manner than other effects (for example, other notice effects such as a step-up notice effect). For example, the predetermined effect can be easily recognized by enlarging the display area of the predetermined effect or darkening the display area of other effects other than the predetermined effect. In the case of such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to a predetermined effect with a high expectation.

(15) As a predetermined effect, when an effect (for example, a predetermined effect (◯)) for notifying that the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in a state in which a game ball easily passes is executed. A gaming machine that executes a predetermined effect more easily than other effects (for example, other notice effects such as a step-up notice effect). For example, the predetermined effect can be easily recognized by enlarging the display area of the predetermined effect or darkening the display area of other effects other than the predetermined effect. In the case of such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to a predetermined effect with a high expectation.

(16) As a predetermined effect, a display area for performing an effect of notifying that a specific effect is executed in a variable display of decorative symbols is controlled, and as a predetermined effect, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is controlled so that a game ball can easily pass therethrough. You may comprise so that the display area which performs the effect which alert | reports this may be provided separately (for example, two roulette windows for performing the effect of the aspect which a roulette rotates) are provided.

  Furthermore, in each embodiment shown above, the characteristic structure of the gaming machine as shown in the following (A) to (N) is also shown.

(A) A plurality of types of identification information (for example, special symbols, decorations, etc.) that can be identified based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, winning a game ball to the first start winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14) When the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a predetermined specific display result (for example, jackpot symbol), the specific gaming state (for example, jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player ) And a predetermined gaming state (for example, a variable winning ball device 15) that opens a variable winning device (for example, a variable winning ball device 15) based on the establishment of a specific condition (for example, a winning symbol is derived and displayed as a normal symbol display result). For example, when a predetermined transition condition (for example, a big hit game based on a big hit other than a sudden probability change big hit ends) is established, a normal gaming state (for example, a winning game state based on a hit) is established. A game machine that shifts to an advantageous game state (for example, a high base state (short-time state)) in which a game medium is won more frequently in the variable winning device than in the low base state), and the identification information is variable. Specific effect execution means (for example, steps S829 and S831 in the effect control microcomputer 100) for executing a specific effect (for example, a normal reach effect or a super reach effect) suggesting whether or not the display result becomes a specific display result during display. And a control means for controlling the variable winning device to the open state as a predetermined gaming state (for example, step S404 in the gaming control microcomputer 560). Specific execution is performed in the variable display of the identification information) A predetermined effect for informing whether or not the variable winning device is controlled to be in the open state (for example, a predetermined effect in such a manner that the roulette rotates as shown in FIGS. 45 to 48). Production execution means (for example, a part that executes steps S833 and S851 after steps S810, S826, S856 and steps S827 to S829 in the production control microcomputer 100), and the control means is a variable prize device in a predetermined gaming state. Are controlled to be opened several times (see FIG. 19). In the normal gaming state, the total opening period in the predetermined gaming state (for example, 5.4 seconds) is changed to the total opening period in the predetermined gaming state in the advantageous gaming state (for example, Shorter than 5.44 seconds), and the first opening period (for example, 0.1 second) is set to the second and subsequent opening periods (for example, 0.1 second). 5.3 seconds), and in the advantageous gaming state, each release period (for example, 1.36 seconds) in the predetermined gaming state is longer than the longest release period (for example, 5.3 seconds) in the normal gaming state. The predetermined effect executing means executes the specific effect when executing the effect (for example, the predetermined effect (◯)) notifying that the variable winning device is controlled to be in the open state as the predetermined effect. When the variable display of the identification information is started, the predetermined effect being executed is replaced with an effect that notifies that the specific effect is executed in the variable display of the identification information (for example, the notification result is “chance” or A gaming machine that includes effect replacement means (for example, a portion that executes steps S5022 to S5028 in the effect control microcomputer 100).
According to such a configuration, when a variable display of identification information for executing a specific effect is started when an effect that informs that the variable winning device is controlled to be in the open state is executed as the predetermined effect. In this case, it is possible to replace the predetermined effect being executed with an effect informing that the specific effect is executed, and to improve the interest for the predetermined effect, and in the normal gaming state, the variable winning device is open. It is possible to increase the player's expectation to be controlled by the player.

(B) A plurality of types of identification information (for example, special symbols, decorations) that can be identified based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, winning a game ball to the first start winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14) When the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a predetermined specific display result (for example, jackpot symbol), the specific gaming state (for example, jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player ) And a predetermined gaming state (for example, a variable winning ball device 15) that opens a variable winning device (for example, a variable winning ball device 15) based on the establishment of a specific condition (for example, a winning symbol is derived and displayed as a normal symbol display result). For example, when a predetermined transition condition (for example, a big hit game based on a big hit other than a sudden probability change big hit ends) is established, a normal gaming state (for example, a winning game state based on a hit) is established. A game machine that shifts to an advantageous game state (for example, a high base state (short-time state)) in which a game medium is won more frequently in the variable winning device than in the low base state), and the identification information is variable. Specific effect execution means (for example, steps S829 and S831 in the effect control microcomputer 100) for executing a specific effect (for example, a normal reach effect or a super reach effect) suggesting whether or not the display result becomes a specific display result during display. And a control means for controlling the variable winning device to the open state as a predetermined gaming state (for example, step S404 in the gaming control microcomputer 560). Specific execution is performed in the variable display of the identification information) A predetermined effect for informing whether or not the variable winning device is controlled to be in the open state (for example, a predetermined effect in such a manner that the roulette rotates as shown in FIGS. 45 to 48). Production execution means (for example, a part that executes steps S833 and S851 after steps S810, S826, S856 and steps S827 to S829 in the production control microcomputer 100), and the control means is a variable prize device in a predetermined gaming state. Are controlled to be opened several times (see FIG. 19). In the normal gaming state, the total opening period in the predetermined gaming state (for example, 5.4 seconds) is changed to the total opening period in the predetermined gaming state in the advantageous gaming state (for example, Shorter than 5.44 seconds), and the first opening period (for example, 0.1 second) is set to the second and subsequent opening periods (for example, 0.1 second). 5.3 seconds), and in the advantageous gaming state, each release period (for example, 1.36 seconds) in the predetermined gaming state is longer than the longest release period (for example, 5.3 seconds) in the normal gaming state. The predetermined effect execution means executes an effect (for example, a predetermined effect (chance), a predetermined effect (extreme heat)) that notifies that the specific effect is executed in the variable display of the identification information as the predetermined effect. When the specific condition is satisfied, the predetermined effect being executed is replaced with an effect informing that the variable winning device is controlled to be in the open state (for example, the notification result is replaced with “◯”). A gaming machine including replacement means (for example, a part of steps S5120 to S5128 (see FIG. 89) in the production control microcomputer 100).
According to such a configuration, when a specific condition is satisfied when an effect for notifying that a specific effect is executed as a predetermined effect is being executed, the variable winning device displays the predetermined effect being executed. It is possible to replace with an effect that informs that it is controlled to the open state, it is possible to improve the interest for the predetermined effect, and in the normal game state, the player to the variable winning device is controlled to the open state Expectation can be raised.

(C) The specific effect execution means may have a display result as the specific display result during the variable display of the identification information compared to the first specific effect (for example, the normal reach effect) and the first specific effect as the specific effect. The second specific effect (for example, a super reach effect) that suggests that the effect is high can be executed, and the effect replacement unit is configured to start variable display of identification information in which the second specific effect is executed. Compared to the case where variable display of identification information for which the first specific effect is executed is started, the predetermined effect is replaced at a higher rate (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the effect selected in step S5025). By executing step S5026 using the replacement determination table, as shown in FIG. 63, when the super reach effect is executed, the normal reach effect is executed. If compared with, determines to perform the replacement of a given effect at a high rate) may be configured so. According to such a configuration, when the variable display of the identification information in which the second specific effect with high expectation is executed is started, the replacement of the predetermined effect is executed at a high rate, so that the interest for the predetermined effect is improved. Can be made.

(D) The effect replacement means executes the specific effect when the specific effect is executed and the variable display of the identification information in which the display result becomes the specific display result is started, but the display result becomes the specific display result. Compared to the case where variable display of the identification information that is not started is started, replacement of a predetermined effect is executed at a higher rate (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 uses the effect replacement determination table selected in step S5025). By executing step S5026, as shown in FIG. 63, it is determined that the replacement of the predetermined effect is executed at a higher rate in the case of the big hit compared to the case other than the big hit). May be. According to such a configuration, when the variable display of the identification information whose display result becomes the specific display result is started, the replacement of the predetermined effect is executed at a high rate, so that the interest for the predetermined effect can be improved. .

(E) The predetermined effect executing means executes a special effect (for example, an open display (first special effect) for displaying a character string such as “opening”) that notifies that the variable winning device is controlled to the open state. When the replacement of the predetermined effect is executed by the effect replacement means, the special effect is executed (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs steps S5029, S738, S739 after steps S5022 to S5028. To display an open display). According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify that the variable winning device is controlled to the open state even when the predetermined effect is replaced.

(F) The predetermined effect execution means suggests the possibility that the specific effect is executed in the variable display of the identification information as the predetermined effect, and also indicates the possibility that the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific display result. This suggests the possibility that the specific effect is executed in the effect (for example, the predetermined effect (chance)) for notifying the first specific notification result (for example, the image including the character string “chance”) and the variable display of the identification information. And a second specific notification result (for example, an image including a character string of “hot”) that suggests that the display result of the variable display of the identification information is likely to be the specific display result as compared with the first specific notification result. ) (For example, a predetermined effect (severe heat)) can be executed, and the effect replacement means performs the predetermined effect when the effect for notifying the first specific notification result is being executed as the predetermined effect. age The effect is replaced at a higher rate than when the effect for informing the second specific notification result is being executed (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 selects in step S5125 (see FIG. 89)). By performing step S5126 (see FIG. 89) using the effect replacement determination table, as shown in FIG. 90, when the notification result is “chance”, it is compared with the case of “hot”. Thus, it may be determined that the replacement of the predetermined effect is executed at a high rate). According to such a configuration, the variable winning device is controlled at a high rate so that the game medium easily passes when an effect of notifying the first specific notification result with low expectation is being executed as the predetermined effect. Since the replacement of the effect to notify the effect is executed, the interest for the predetermined effect can be improved.

(G) When the predetermined effect is executed in the variable display of the identification information whose display result does not become the specific display result, the effect replacement means performs the predetermined effect in the variable display of the identification information in which the display result becomes the specific display result. Compared to when it is being executed, replacement of the predetermined effect is executed at a higher rate (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 uses the effect replacement determination table selected in step S5125 (see FIG. 89) to perform the step. By executing S5126, as shown in FIG. 90, it is determined that the replacement of the predetermined effect is executed at a higher rate when it is a big hit than when it is a big hit). Also good. According to such a configuration, when variable display of identification information whose display result does not become a specific display result is started, a replacement to an effect that notifies that the variable winning device is controlled to the open state at a high rate is performed. Since it performs, the interest with respect to a predetermined effect can be improved.

(H) The predetermined effect execution means can execute a special effect (for example, a cut-in effect (second special effect)) for notifying whether or not the specific effect is executed in the variable display of the identification information. When the replacement of the predetermined effect is executed by the replacement unit, the special effect is executed (for example, in the fourth embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs steps S5128P and S844P after steps S5120 to S5128. -S844R may be executed to execute a cut-in effect). According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify that the specific effect is executed even when the predetermined effect is replaced.

(I) A plurality of types of identification information (for example, special symbols, decorations, etc.) that can be identified based on establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, winning of a game ball to the first start winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14) When the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a predetermined specific display result (for example, jackpot symbol), the specific gaming state (for example, jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player ) And a predetermined gaming state (for example, a variable winning ball device 15) that opens a variable winning device (for example, a variable winning ball device 15) based on the establishment of a specific condition (for example, a winning symbol is derived and displayed as a normal symbol display result). For example, when a predetermined transition condition (for example, a big hit game based on a big hit other than a sudden probability change big hit ends) is established, a normal gaming state (for example, a winning game state based on a hit) is established. A game machine that shifts to an advantageous game state (for example, a high base state (short-time state)) in which a game medium is won more frequently in the variable winning device than in the low base state), and the identification information is variable. Specific effect execution means (for example, steps S829 and S831 in the effect control microcomputer 100) for executing a specific effect (for example, a normal reach effect or a super reach effect) suggesting whether or not the display result becomes a specific display result during display. And a control means for controlling the variable winning device to the open state as a predetermined gaming state (for example, step S404 in the gaming control microcomputer 560). Specific execution is performed in the variable display of the identification information) A predetermined effect for informing whether or not the variable winning device is controlled to be in the open state (for example, a predetermined effect in such a manner that the roulette rotates as shown in FIGS. 45 to 48). Production control means (for example, a part for executing steps S833 and S851 after steps S810, S826, S856 and steps S827 to S829 in the production control microcomputer 100), the control means is a predetermined game in the normal gaming state. In the state, the variable winning device is controlled to be opened several times (see FIG. 19A), and the first opening period (for example, 0.1 second) is made shorter than the second and subsequent opening periods (for example, 5. 3 seconds), when the control means controls the variable winning device to the first open state, a predetermined command (for example, a normal electric accessory opening end designation frame) Command transmission means for transmitting the command (see FIG. 15) (for example, a part for executing the process of step S404 in the game control microcomputer 560 (a process during the opening of the ordinary electric accessory): normally when the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is closed. And a predetermined effect executing means for notifying that the variable winning device is controlled to be in an open state based on the reception of the predetermined command. 49 (see steps S740A and S740B in FIG. 49), the predetermined effect executing means is executing an effect (for example, a predetermined effect (◯)) for notifying that the variable winning device is controlled to be in the open state as the predetermined effect. When the variable display of the identification information for which the specific effect is executed is started, the predetermined effect being executed is specified in the variable display of the identification information. Effect replacement means (for example, the steps S5022 to S5028 in the effect control microcomputer 100 are executed) (for example, the notification result is replaced with “chance” or “extreme heat”). Game machine including part).
According to such a configuration, when a variable display of identification information for executing a specific effect is started when an effect that informs that the variable winning device is controlled to be in the open state is executed as the predetermined effect. In this case, it is possible to replace the predetermined effect being executed with an effect informing that the specific effect is executed, and to improve the interest for the predetermined effect, and in the normal gaming state, the variable winning device is open. It is possible to increase the player's expectation that the player will be controlled by the player, and to increase the player's expectation that the variable winning device will be controlled to the open state in the normal gaming state.

(J) A plurality of types of identification information (for example, special symbols, decorations) that can be identified based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, winning of a game ball in the first start winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14) When the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a predetermined specific display result (for example, jackpot symbol), the specific gaming state (for example, jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player ) And a predetermined gaming state (for example, a variable winning ball device 15) that opens a variable winning device (for example, a variable winning ball device 15) based on the establishment of a specific condition (for example, a winning symbol is derived and displayed as a normal symbol display result). For example, when a predetermined transition condition (for example, a big hit game based on a big hit other than a sudden probability change big hit ends) is established, a normal gaming state (for example, a winning game state based on a hit) is established. A game machine that shifts to an advantageous game state (for example, a high base state (short-time state)) in which a game medium is won more frequently in the variable winning device than in the low base state), and the identification information is variable. Specific effect execution means (for example, steps S829 and S831 in the effect control microcomputer 100) for executing a specific effect (for example, a normal reach effect or a super reach effect) suggesting whether or not the display result becomes a specific display result during display. And a control means for controlling the variable winning device to the open state as a predetermined gaming state (for example, step S404 in the gaming control microcomputer 560). Specific execution is performed in the variable display of the identification information) A predetermined effect for informing whether or not the variable winning device is controlled to be in the open state (for example, a predetermined effect in such a manner that the roulette rotates as shown in FIGS. 45 to 48). Production control means (for example, a part for executing steps S833 and S851 after steps S810, S826, S856 and steps S827 to S829 in the production control microcomputer 100), the control means is a predetermined game in the normal gaming state. In the state, the variable winning device is controlled to be opened several times (see FIG. 19A), and the first opening period (for example, 0.1 second) is made shorter than the second and subsequent opening periods (for example, 5. 3 seconds), when the control means controls the variable winning device to the first open state, a predetermined command (for example, a normal electric accessory opening end designation frame) Command transmission means for transmitting the command (see FIG. 15) (for example, a part for executing the process of step S404 in the game control microcomputer 560 (a process during the opening of the ordinary electric accessory): normally when the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is closed. And a predetermined effect executing means for notifying that the variable winning device is controlled to be in an open state based on the reception of the predetermined command. 49 (see steps S740A and S740B in FIG. 49), the predetermined effect execution means notifies the fact that the specific effect is executed in the variable display of the identification information as the predetermined effect (for example, the predetermined effect (chance), the predetermined effect (extreme heat) )), When the specific condition is satisfied, the variable winning device is set to the open state with the predetermined effect being executed. An effect replacement means (for example, a part for executing steps S5120 to S5128 (see FIG. 89) in the effect control microcomputer 100) that replaces the effect to notify that it is controlled (for example, replaces the notification result with “◯”). Including gaming machines.
According to such a configuration, when a specific condition is satisfied when an effect for notifying that a specific effect is executed as a predetermined effect is being executed, the variable winning device displays the predetermined effect being executed. It is possible to replace with an effect that informs that it is controlled to the open state, it is possible to improve the interest for the predetermined effect, and in the normal game state, the player to the variable winning device is controlled to the open state The expectation can be enhanced, and the player's expectation that the variable winning device is controlled to be open in the normal gaming state can be enhanced.

(K) A plurality of types of identification information (for example, special symbols, decorations) that can be identified based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, winning of a game ball to the first start winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14) When the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a predetermined specific display result (for example, jackpot symbol), the specific gaming state (for example, jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player ) And a predetermined gaming state (for example, a variable winning ball device 15) that opens a variable winning device (for example, a variable winning ball device 15) based on the establishment of a specific condition (for example, a winning symbol is derived and displayed as a normal symbol display result). For example, when a predetermined transition condition (for example, a big hit game based on a big hit other than a sudden probability change big hit ends) is established, a normal gaming state (for example, a winning game state based on a hit) is established. A game machine that shifts to an advantageous game state (for example, a high base state (short-time state)) in which a game medium is won more frequently in the variable winning device than in the low base state), and the identification information is variable. Specific effect execution means (for example, steps S829 and S831 in the effect control microcomputer 100) for executing a specific effect (for example, a normal reach effect or a super reach effect) suggesting whether or not the display result becomes a specific display result during display. And a control means for controlling the variable winning device to the open state as a predetermined gaming state (for example, step S404 in the gaming control microcomputer 560). Specific execution is performed in the variable display of the identification information) A predetermined effect for informing whether or not the variable winning device is controlled to be in the open state (for example, a predetermined effect in such a manner that the roulette rotates as shown in FIGS. 45 to 48). Production execution means (for example, a part that executes steps S833 and S851 after steps S810, S826, S856 and steps S827 to S829 in the production control microcomputer 100), and the control means is a variable prize device in a predetermined gaming state. Is controlled to be in an open state multiple times (see FIG. 19). In the normal game state, the total non-open state period (for example, 4.5 seconds) between the multiple open states in the predetermined game state is set in the advantageous game state. The predetermined effect is made longer than the total (for example, 4.14 seconds) of the non-open state between a plurality of open states in the predetermined game state. The execution means variably displays the identification information in which the specific effect is executed when executing the effect (for example, the predetermined effect (◯)) for notifying that the variable winning device is controlled to be in the open state as the predetermined effect. Is started, the predetermined effect being executed is replaced with an effect informing that the specific effect is executed in the variable display of the identification information (for example, the notification result is replaced with “chance” or “extreme heat”). ) A gaming machine including effect replacement means (for example, a portion of steps S5022 to S5028 in the effect control microcomputer 100).
According to such a configuration, when a variable display of identification information for executing a specific effect is started when an effect that informs that the variable winning device is controlled to be in the open state is executed as the predetermined effect. In this case, it is possible to replace the predetermined effect being executed with an effect informing that the specific effect is executed, to improve the interest of the predetermined effect, and to play the variable prize device in the normal gaming state. It is possible to prevent the ball winnings from becoming excessive and causing a disadvantage to the game shop.

(L) A plurality of types of identification information (for example, special symbols, decorations) that can be identified based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, winning of a game ball to the first start winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14) When the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a predetermined specific display result (for example, jackpot symbol), the specific gaming state (for example, jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player ) And a predetermined gaming state (for example, a variable winning ball device 15) that opens a variable winning device (for example, a variable winning ball device 15) based on the establishment of a specific condition (for example, a winning symbol is derived and displayed as a normal symbol display result). For example, when a predetermined transition condition (for example, a big hit game based on a big hit other than a sudden probability change big hit ends) is established, a normal gaming state (for example, a winning game state based on a hit) is established. A game machine that shifts to an advantageous game state (for example, a high base state (short-time state)) in which a game medium is won more frequently in the variable winning device than in the low base state), and the identification information is variable. Specific effect execution means (for example, steps S829 and S831 in the effect control microcomputer 100) for executing a specific effect (for example, a normal reach effect or a super reach effect) suggesting whether or not the display result becomes a specific display result during display. And a control means for controlling the variable winning device to the open state as a predetermined gaming state (for example, step S404 in the gaming control microcomputer 560). Specific execution is performed in the variable display of the identification information) A predetermined effect for informing whether or not the variable winning device is controlled to be in the open state (for example, a predetermined effect in such a manner that the roulette rotates as shown in FIGS. 45 to 48). Production execution means (for example, a part that executes steps S833 and S851 after steps S810, S826, S856 and steps S827 to S829 in the production control microcomputer 100), and the control means is a variable prize device in a predetermined gaming state. Is controlled to be in an open state multiple times (see FIG. 96). In the normal game state, the total non-open state period (for example, 4.5 seconds) between the multiple open states in the predetermined game state is set to the advantageous game state. The predetermined effect is made shorter than the total (for example, 4.14 seconds) of the non-open state between a plurality of open states in the predetermined game state. The execution means variably displays the identification information in which the specific effect is executed when executing the effect (for example, the predetermined effect (◯)) for notifying that the variable winning device is controlled to be in the open state as the predetermined effect. Is started, the predetermined effect being executed is replaced with an effect informing that the specific effect is executed in the variable display of the identification information (for example, the notification result is replaced with “chance” or “extreme heat”). ) A gaming machine including effect replacement means (for example, a portion of steps S5022 to S5028 in the effect control microcomputer 100).
According to such a configuration, when a variable display of identification information for executing a specific effect is started when an effect that informs that the variable winning device is controlled to be in the open state is executed as the predetermined effect. In this case, it is possible to replace the predetermined effect being executed with an effect informing that the specific effect is executed, to improve the interest of the predetermined effect, and to play the variable prize device in the advantageous game state. It is possible to prevent the ball winnings from becoming excessive and causing a disadvantage to the game shop.

(M) A plurality of types of identification information (for example, special symbols, decorations) that can be identified based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, winning of a game ball to the first start winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14) When the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a predetermined specific display result (for example, jackpot symbol), the specific gaming state (for example, jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player ) And a predetermined gaming state (for example, a variable winning ball device 15) that opens a variable winning device (for example, a variable winning ball device 15) based on the establishment of a specific condition (for example, a winning symbol is derived and displayed as a normal symbol display result). For example, when a predetermined transition condition (for example, a big hit game based on a big hit other than a sudden probability change big hit ends) is established, a normal gaming state (for example, a winning game state based on a hit) is established. A game machine that shifts to an advantageous game state (for example, a high base state (short-time state)) in which a game medium is won more frequently in the variable winning device than in the low base state), and the identification information is variable. Specific effect execution means (for example, steps S829 and S831 in the effect control microcomputer 100) for executing a specific effect (for example, a normal reach effect or a super reach effect) suggesting whether or not the display result becomes a specific display result during display. And a control means for controlling the variable winning device to the open state as a predetermined gaming state (for example, step S404 in the gaming control microcomputer 560). Specific execution is performed in the variable display of the identification information) A predetermined effect for informing whether or not the variable winning device is controlled to be in the open state (for example, a predetermined effect in such a manner that the roulette rotates as shown in FIGS. 45 to 48). Production execution means (for example, a part that executes steps S833 and S851 after steps S810, S826, S856 and steps S827 to S829 in the production control microcomputer 100), and the control means is a variable prize device in a predetermined gaming state. Is controlled to be in an open state multiple times (see FIG. 19). In the normal game state, the total non-open state period (for example, 4.5 seconds) between the multiple open states in the predetermined game state is set in the advantageous game state. The predetermined effect is made longer than the total (for example, 4.14 seconds) of the non-open state between a plurality of open states in the predetermined game state. When the execution means is executing an effect (for example, a predetermined effect (chance), a predetermined effect (extreme heat)) that notifies that the specific effect is executed in the variable display of the identification information as the predetermined effect, the specific condition Is established, an effect replacement means (for example, replaces the notification result with “◯”) is replaced with an effect that notifies that the variable prize-winning device is controlled to the open state (for example, replaces the notification result with “◯”). A gaming machine that includes steps S5120 to S5128 (see FIG. 90) of the production control microcomputer 100.
According to such a configuration, when a specific condition is satisfied when an effect for notifying that a specific effect is executed as a predetermined effect is being executed, the variable winning device displays the predetermined effect being executed. It is possible to replace with an effect that informs that it is controlled to the open state, and it is possible to improve the interest for the predetermined effect, and in the normal game state, the winning of the game ball to the variable winning device becomes excessive, and the game store It is possible to prevent a disadvantage from being caused.

(N) A plurality of types of identification information (for example, special symbols, decorations, etc.) that can be identified based on satisfaction of a predetermined condition (for example, winning of a game ball to the first start winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14) When the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a predetermined specific display result (for example, jackpot symbol), the specific gaming state (for example, jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player ) And a predetermined gaming state (for example, a variable winning ball device 15) that opens a variable winning device (for example, a variable winning ball device 15) based on the establishment of a specific condition (for example, a winning symbol is derived and displayed as a normal symbol display result). For example, when a predetermined transition condition (for example, a big hit game based on a big hit other than a sudden probability change big hit ends) is established, a normal gaming state (for example, a winning game state based on a hit) is established. A game machine that shifts to an advantageous game state (for example, a high base state (short-time state)) in which a game medium is won more frequently in the variable winning device than in the low base state), and the identification information is variable. Specific effect execution means (for example, steps S829 and S831 in the effect control microcomputer 100) for executing a specific effect (for example, a normal reach effect or a super reach effect) suggesting whether or not the display result becomes a specific display result during display. And a control means for controlling the variable winning device to the open state as a predetermined gaming state (for example, step S404 in the gaming control microcomputer 560). Specific execution is performed in the variable display of the identification information) A predetermined effect for informing whether or not the variable winning device is controlled to be in the open state (for example, a predetermined effect in such a manner that the roulette rotates as shown in FIGS. 45 to 48). Production execution means (for example, a part that executes steps S833 and S851 after steps S810, S826, S856 and steps S827 to S829 in the production control microcomputer 100), and the control means is a variable prize device in a predetermined gaming state. Is controlled to be in the open state multiple times (see FIG. 96), and in the normal game state, the total non-open state period (for example, 4.14 seconds) between the multiple open states in the predetermined game state is set in the advantageous game state. The predetermined effect is made shorter than the total period (for example, 4.5 seconds) of the non-open state between a plurality of open states in the predetermined game state. When the execution means is executing an effect (for example, a predetermined effect (chance), a predetermined effect (extreme heat)) that notifies that the specific effect is executed in the variable display of the identification information as the predetermined effect, the specific condition Is established, an effect replacement means (for example, replaces the notification result with “◯”) is replaced with an effect that notifies that the variable prize-winning device is controlled to the open state (for example, replaces the notification result with “◯”). A gaming machine that includes steps S5120 to S5128 (see FIG. 90) of the production control microcomputer 100.
According to such a configuration, when a specific condition is satisfied when an effect for notifying that a specific effect is executed as a predetermined effect is being executed, the variable winning device displays the predetermined effect being executed. It is possible to replace with an effect that informs that it is controlled to the open state, it is possible to improve the interest for the predetermined effect, and in the advantageous game state, the winning of the game ball to the variable winning device becomes excessive, and the amusement store It is possible to prevent a disadvantage from being caused.

  In addition, in each embodiment shown above, the characteristic structure of the gaming machine as shown in the following (1) to (2) is also shown.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention performs variable display of first identification information (for example, a special symbol, a decorative symbol), and a predetermined display result (for example, a variable display result of the first identification information). , Jackpot symbol), control to a specific gaming state (for example, jackpot gaming state) advantageous to the player, variable display of the second identification information, the display result of the variable display of the second identification information Is a gaming machine that controls a predetermined gaming state (for example, a winning gaming state based on winning) when a predetermined display result (for example, winning symbol) is obtained, and a variable winning device (for example, variable winning ball, for example) as the predetermined gaming state The variable prize-winning device control means for controlling the device 15) to the open state (for example, the part for executing step S404 in the game control microcomputer 560) and the variable display of the first identification information. Notification effect (for example, a roulette as shown in FIGS. 45 to 48 rotates) to notify the possibility of a specific display result or to notify whether or not the variable winning device is controlled to the open state. A notification effect executing means (for example, a portion that executes steps S833 and S851 after steps S810, S826, S856 and steps S827 to S829 in the effect control microcomputer 100). The execution means starts the variable display of the first identification information when executing the effect (for example, the predetermined effect (◯)) for notifying that the variable winning device is controlled to the open state as the notification effect. In this case, the notification effect being executed is replaced with an effect that notifies the possibility of a specific display result in the variable display of the first identification information. For example, it includes an effect replacement means (for example, a part that executes steps S5022 to S5028 in the effect control microcomputer 100), and the variable winning device control means is variable. It is possible to control the variable prize-winning device to the open state so that the game medium launched after the start of the notification that the prize-winning device is controlled to the open state can be won (for example, as shown in FIG. (3 seconds) is provided with an interval period of 4.5 seconds, so that a game ball launched after displaying the long-term release notification image is sufficient for winning the variable winning ball device 15 A period is provided).
According to such a configuration, when the variable display of the first identification information is started while performing the effect of notifying that the variable winning device is controlled to the open state as the notification effect, the execution is performed. It is possible to replace the inside notification effect with an effect that notifies the possibility of a specific display result, and to improve the interest in the notification effect. In addition, the period after the start of the notification that the variable winning device is controlled to the open state is too short, and the player recognizes the notification that the variable winning device is controlled to the open state, and then to the variable winning device. It is possible to prevent a situation in which profits cannot be obtained in time even if the game medium is won.

(2) The variable display of the first identification information (for example, a special symbol, a decorative symbol) was performed, and the display result of the variable display of the first identification information became a predetermined specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol). Sometimes, the control is performed to a specific gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player, the second identification information is variably displayed, and the display result of the variable display of the second identification information is a predetermined display result (for example, A gaming machine that controls a predetermined gaming state (for example, a winning gaming state based on winning) when the winning symbol is reached, and sets the variable winning device (for example, variable winning ball device 15) to the open state as the predetermined gaming state. The variable winning device control means to be controlled (for example, the part for executing step S404 in the game control microcomputer 560) and the specific display result in the variable display of the first identification information. A notification effect (for example, a predetermined effect in such a manner that the roulette rotates as shown in FIGS. 45 to 48) for notifying the performance or notifying whether or not the variable winning device is controlled to the open state. And a notification effect executing means (for example, a part that executes steps S833 and S851 after steps S810, S826, S856 and steps S827 to S829 in the effect control microcomputer 100). When the effect (for example, the predetermined effect (chance), the predetermined effect (extreme heat)) for notifying the possibility of a specific display result in the variable display of the first identification information is being executed, the display result is the predetermined display result. When the variable display of the second identification information is started, the variable winning device is controlled to open the notification effect being executed. Including an effect replacement means (for example, a part that executes steps S5120 to S5128 (see FIG. 89) in the effect control microcomputer 100) that replaces the effect to notify the effect (for example, replaces the notification result with “◯”); The variable winning device control means can control the variable winning device to the open state so that a game medium launched after the start of notification that the variable winning device is controlled to the open state can be won (for example, as shown in FIG. 67). As described above, by providing an interval period of 4.5 seconds before opening for a long period (5.3 seconds), a game ball launched after displaying a long-term opening notification image is a variable winning ball apparatus. 15 is provided with a sufficient period for winning 15).
According to such a configuration, when the display of the second identification information in which the display result becomes the predetermined display result is started when the effect of notifying the possibility of being the specific display result is executed as the notification effect. Therefore, it is possible to replace the notification effect that is being executed with an effect that notifies that the variable winning device is controlled to be in the open state, and it is possible to improve the interest in the notification effect. In addition, the period after the start of the notification that the variable winning device is controlled to the open state is too short, and the player recognizes the notification that the variable winning device is controlled to the open state, and then to the variable winning device. It is possible to prevent a situation in which profits cannot be obtained in time even if the game medium is won.

  The present invention is preferably applied to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine capable of a predetermined game.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 8a 1st special symbol display device 8b 2nd special symbol display device 9 Production display device 13 1st start winning opening 14 2nd starting winning opening 15 Variable winning ball device 20 Special variable winning ball device 31 Game control board ( Main board)
32 gate 32a gate switch 56 CPU
80 Production control board 100 Production control microcomputer 101 Production control CPU
109 VDP
DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 120 Push button 121 Trigger button 122 Stick controller 123 Tilt direction sensor unit 124 Push sensor 125 Trigger sensor 560 Microcomputer for game control

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that performs variable display based on the establishment of a variable display start condition, and controls an advantageous state advantageous to the player when a specific display result is derived and displayed as a display result,
Variable winning device control means for controlling the variable winning device so that the game medium can easily enter based on the fact that the game medium has passed the predetermined area;
Predetermined effect executing means for notifying the possibility of the specific display result in variable display or executing a predetermined effect for notifying whether or not the variable winning device is controlled so that a game medium can easily enter. When,
A gaming machine comprising: a predetermined effect restricting means for restricting execution of the predetermined effect during a predetermined period when the variable display is not performed.

Images